Bizhub423 - Theoryof Operation

SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-18
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-20
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub 423/363/283/223 Main body

OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................. 15
DF-621
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 7
PC-109/PC-208
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
PC-409
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
JS-505
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
FS-527
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
PK-517
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
i
SD-509
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
JS-603
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
FS-529
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
AU-102/AU-201
AU-102............................................................................................................................ 1
AU-201............................................................................................................................ 2
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-604............................................................................................................................ 1
EK-605............................................................................................................................ 2
SC-507 ........................................................................................................................... 4
ii
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended.
Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and
“ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited
meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium

trouble, and property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when servicing the

product. General Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
:Prohibition when servicing the

product. General Do not touch Do not
prohibition with wet hand disassemble
:Direction when servicing the

product. General Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with

wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between

relay contacts).
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.).

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed

by KMBT.
• Using parts not specified by KMBT.
S-2
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)
to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the
supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
kw
uct’s rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product’s rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-

minals of the plug according to the following order:
•Black or Brown:L (line)
•White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
•Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
S-3
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi-
neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety
and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same
configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to kw
inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer
to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall
outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet

securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,
overheating, and the risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-
uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or

pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace
with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each
end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord
may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
S-5
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken
up. Fire may result.
2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such

as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
S-6
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Stability
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect

the power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some
units are still powered even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
S-7
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Do not leave the machine unattended during transporta-
tion, installation, and inspection of the machine. If it is to
be unavoidably left unattended, face protrusions toward
the wall or take other necessary risk reducing action.
The user may stumble over a protrusion of the machine
or be caught by a cable, falling to the floor or being
injured.
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover

detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-
tric shock exists.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with

the door open or external covers removed, always be
attentive to the motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause unexpected haz-
ards.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damage.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be atten-

tive to the motion of the fellow worker of the joint work.
The fellow worker may be injured with his or her finger or
hand pinched between the machine and the option.
S-8
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When mounting an option on the machine, be careful
about the clearance between the machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand pinched
between the machine and the option.
• When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other

moving part, disassembling a unit, or reinstalling any of
such parts and units, be careful about moving parts and
use care not to drop any part or unit. During the service
procedure, give sufficient support for any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
• Check the external covers and frame for possible sharp
edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or servicing.
• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful

about sharp edges and burrs of the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and

screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-

cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or
fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for

deterioration and sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
S-9
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)
incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply

power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-
ing position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-

ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,

optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-
tion state.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and

check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an
electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in
the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-

tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-10
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (ace-
tone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled
with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before

any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take

care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to
discomfort.
S-11
[4] Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recom-
mandé par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-
tillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
S-12
[5] Laser Safety

• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of
danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this
manual.
5.1 Internal Laser Radiation
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 15 mW
bizhub 423/363 17.3 µW
Maximum average radiation power (*)
bizhub 283/223 13.9 µW
Wavelength 770-800 nm
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit
• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The
laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
Laser Aperture
of the Print Head
Unit
Print Head Unit
A1UDP0C500DA
S-13
U.S.A., Canada
(CDRH Regulation)
• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-
dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory
for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
• The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
All Areas
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
Denmark
ADVARSEL
• Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1
sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens højeste styrke 15 mW
bølgelængden 770-800 nm
S-14
Finland, Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
• Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-
taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser-
säteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho 15 mW
aallonpituus 770-800 nm
VARNING!
• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,
kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen
för laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 15 mW
våglängden 770-800 nm
VARO!
• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle laser-
säteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
• Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej stråien.
Norway
ADVERSEL
• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-
ing, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensen
for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 15 mW
bølgelengde 770-800 nm
S-15
5.2 Laser Safety Label

• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
*only for the U.S.A.
A1UDP0E504DA
5.3 Laser Caution Label

• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
A1UDP0C503DA
S-16
5.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.
S-17
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should
be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
A1UDP0E505DA
S-18
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
A1UDP0E507DA
CAUTION:
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to
touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service
office.
S-19
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN

ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further
damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-
tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-
fied by every distributor.
S-20
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship
between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-
tomer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,

product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit,
operating system, and control system
<Field service section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration, and product

specifications
MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-
vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
adjustment etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
their countermeasures etc.
APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
C-1
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) bizhub 423/363/283/223: Main body

(2) Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7: Windows 7
When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista/7
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C. Feeding direction
• When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short
edge feeding. The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is
called the long edge feeding.
• Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the
paper size. No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding.
When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be
added to the paper size.
<Sample notation>
Paper size Feeding direction Notation

Long edge feeding A4
A4
Short edge feeding A4S
A3 Short edge feeding A3
C-2
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2010/04 1.0 — Issue of the first edition

Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CONTENTS
bizhub 423/363/283/223 Main body
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 3
2.1 Type ...................................................................................................................... 3
OUTLINE
2.2 Functions .............................................................................................................. 4
2.3 Paper .................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Materials ............................................................................................................... 7
2.5 Print volume.......................................................................................................... 7
2.6 Machine specifications.......................................................................................... 8
2.7 Operating environment ......................................................................................... 8
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
2.8 Print functions ....................................................................................................... 9
2.9 Scan functions .................................................................................................... 12
3. SECTION CONFIGURATION................................................................................ 13
4. PAPER PATH......................................................................................................... 14
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 15
5.1 Control block diagram ......................................................................................... 15
5.2 Image creation process ...................................................................................... 16
5.3 Image forming control ......................................................................................... 17
5.4 Process speed .................................................................................................... 18
6. INTERFACE SECTION ......................................................................................... 19
6.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 19
6.1.1 Rear side 1.................................................................................................. 19
6.1.2 Rear side 2.................................................................................................. 20
7. SCANNER SECTION............................................................................................ 21
7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 21
7.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 22
7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 23
7.3.1 When the power is ON ................................................................................ 23
7.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed ........................................................ 24
7.3.3 Original scanning area ................................................................................ 27
7.3.4 Original size detection control ..................................................................... 27
7.3.5 Image processing........................................................................................ 29
i
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) ........................................................................ 30

8.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 30
8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 31
8.2.1 Laser exposure process.............................................................................. 31
8.2.2 Laser emission timing ................................................................................. 32
8.2.3 Advance polygon rotation ........................................................................... 32
8.2.4 Laser emission stop.................................................................................... 32
8.2.5 Laser emission area ................................................................................... 32
OUTLINE
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION .................................................................................. 34

9.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 34
9.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 35
9.2.1 Toner bottle drive ........................................................................................ 35
9.2.2 Toner hopper drive...................................................................................... 35
9.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 36
CONFIGURATION/
9.3.1 Toner flow ................................................................................................... 36

OPERATION
9.3.2 Toner replenishing mechanism ................................................................... 37

9.3.3 Toner replenishing control........................................................................... 38
9.3.4 T/C ratio recovery control ........................................................................... 39
9.3.5 Manual Toner Add control........................................................................... 40
9.3.6 Toner level detection control ....................................................................... 41
9.3.7 Main body interior temperature measurement system ............................... 45
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION) ............................................................ 46
10.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 46
10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 47
10.2.1 Drum unit .................................................................................................... 47
10.2.2 Developing unit ........................................................................................... 47
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 48
10.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................ 48
10.3.2 Imaging unit detection................................................................................. 48
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION ......................................................................................... 49
11.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 49
11.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 50
11.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 51
11.3.1 Charge corona control ................................................................................ 51
11.3.2 Photo conductor cleaning mechanism........................................................ 52
11.3.3 Erase mechanism ....................................................................................... 53
11.3.4 Ozone suction function ............................................................................... 54
11.3.5 Drum dry control ......................................................................................... 55
ii
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.6 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor
mechanism.................................................................................................. 57
11.3.7 Drum unit detection..................................................................................... 58
11.3.8 Drum unit life detection ............................................................................... 59
11.3.9 Life value of drum unit................................................................................. 62
11.3.10 Ozone filter new article detection................................................................ 62
11.3.11 Ozone filter life detection............................................................................. 63
11.3.12 Life value of ozone filter .............................................................................. 64
OUTLINE
12. DEVELOPING SECTION ...................................................................................... 65
12.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 65
12.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 66
12.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 67
12.3.1 Toner flow.................................................................................................... 67
12.3.2 Developing roller ......................................................................................... 68
CONFIGURATION/
12.3.3 HMT (High grade Micro Toning) development............................................. 68
OPERATION
12.3.4 Developing bias........................................................................................... 69
12.3.5 Developer scattering preventive mechanism............................................... 70
12.3.6 TCR sensor control ..................................................................................... 71
12.3.7 Developing unit detection............................................................................ 72
12.3.8 Developing unit life detection ...................................................................... 73
12.3.9 Life value of developing unit........................................................................ 76
12.3.10 Developer new article detection .................................................................. 77
12.3.11 Developer life detection............................................................................... 78
12.3.12 Life value of developer ................................................................................ 81
13. IMAGE TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION ...................................................... 82
13.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 82
13.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 82
13.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 83
13.3.1 Image transfer roller control ........................................................................ 83
13.3.2 Image transfer roller cleaning...................................................................... 83
13.3.3 Image transfer current upper/lower limit control .......................................... 84
13.3.4 Charge neutralization and separation of paper ........................................... 84
13.3.5 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor
mechanism.................................................................................................. 85
13.3.6 Image transfer roller new article detection .................................................. 85
13.3.7 Image transfer roller life detection ............................................................... 86
13.3.8 Life value of image transfer roller ................................................................ 87
iii
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (MANUAL BYPASS TRAY) ........................................... 88

14.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 88
14.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 89
14.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 90
14.3.1 Up/down control.......................................................................................... 90
14.3.2 Paper feed control....................................................................................... 93
14.3.3 Paper size detection control........................................................................ 96
14.3.4 Paper empty detection ................................................................................ 99
OUTLINE
14.3.5 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 100

15. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY 1/TRAY 2)........................................................ 103
15.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 103
15.1.1 Tray 1 ........................................................................................................ 103
15.1.2 Tray 2 ........................................................................................................ 105
15.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 107
CONFIGURATION/
15.2.1 Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 108

OPERATION
15.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 109

15.3.1 Up/down control........................................................................................ 109
15.3.2 Paper feed control..................................................................................... 112
15.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 125
15.3.4 Paper level detection control..................................................................... 127
15.3.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism .......................................................... 130
16. REGISTRATION SECTION ................................................................................ 131
16.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 131
16.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 131
16.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 132
16.3.1 Registration control................................................................................... 132
16.3.2 Registration roller paper dust remover mechanism .................................. 133
16.3.3 Paper dust remover new article detection................................................. 133
16.3.4 Paper dust remover life detection ............................................................. 134
16.3.5 Life value of paper dust remover............................................................... 135
17. FUSING SECTION ............................................................................................. 136
17.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 136
17.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 136
17.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 137
17.3.1 Fusing roller drive control ......................................................................... 137
17.3.2 Fusing temperature control....................................................................... 137
17.3.3 Protection from abnormal temperatures ................................................... 139
17.3.4 Paper feed wait control ............................................................................. 139
17.3.5 Paper-to-paper distance control................................................................ 140
iv
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17.3.6 Curl prevention control .............................................................................. 140
17.3.7 Fusing unit new article detection............................................................... 140
17.3.8 Fusing unit life detection ........................................................................... 141
17.3.9 Life value of fusing unit ............................................................................. 144
18. PAPER EXIT/SWITCHBACK SECTION.............................................................. 145
18.1 Configuration/Drive ........................................................................................... 145
18.2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 146
18.2.1 Transport control ....................................................................................... 146
OUTLINE
19. DUPLEX SECTION............................................................................................. 147
19.1 Configuration/Drive ........................................................................................... 147
19.2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 148
19.2.1 Paper transport control ............................................................................. 148
19.2.2 Duplex circulation control .......................................................................... 150
20. IMAGE PROCESSING ........................................................................................ 155
CONFIGURATION/
20.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram............................................ 155
OPERATION
20.2 Write section image processing block diagram ................................................ 156
21. POWER SUPPLY SECTION ............................................................................... 159
21.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON ............................. 159
21.1.1 Configuration............................................................................................. 159
21.1.2 Operation .................................................................................................. 159
21.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON ............................... 160
21.2.1 Configuration............................................................................................. 160
21.2.2 Operation .................................................................................................. 160
21.3 Power cables .................................................................................................... 161
21.3.1 Configuration............................................................................................. 161
21.3.2 Operation .................................................................................................. 161
22. FAN CONTROL................................................................................................... 162
22.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 162
22.2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 163
22.2.1 Function .................................................................................................... 163
22.2.2 Control condition ....................................................................................... 164
23. COUNTER INFORMATION................................................................................. 165
23.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 165
v
CONFIGURATION/
OUTLINE bizhub 423/363/283/223
OPERATION
vi
Blank Page
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1/2 System front view
[3]
[2] [4]
[21]
[5] [6]
OUTLINE
[17] [18] [19]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[16]
[20] [10]
[15] [14] [13] [12] [11]

A1UDF1E003DA
[1] bizhub 423/363/283/223 [2] Reverse automatic

document feeder *1 DF-621
[3] Assist handle AH-101 [4] Original cover OC-509
[5] Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 [6] Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
[7] Working table WT-506 [8] Local interface kit EK-604
[9] Local interface kit EK-605 [10] Keyboard holder KH-101
[11] Desk DK-508 [12] Paper feed cabinet PC-109
[13] Paper feed cabinet PC-208 [14] Paper feed cabinet PC-409
[15] Saddle stitcher SD-509 [16] Finisher FS-527
[17] Punch kit PK-517 [18] Job separator JS-603
[19] Finisher FS-529 [20] Job separator JS-505
[21] Stamp unit SP-501
*1: Standard equipment only on bizhub 423, and bizhub 363 for North America and Europe.
1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
NOTE
• Use the desk or the paper feed cabinet without fail when installing on the floor in
order to keep the function and quality of the unit.
2/2 System rear view
[7] [8]
[1]
OUTLINE
[6]
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
A1UDF1E004DA
[1] bizhub 423/363/283/223 [2] Fax kit FK-508

[3] Security kit SC-507 [4] Hard Disk *1 HD-516
[5] Mount kit MK-726 [6] Key counter kit KIT-1
[7] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105 [8] Upgrade kit UK-203
*1: Being standard or optional depends on each marketing area and machine model.
For details, see the following list.
Marketing area
North America Europe Others
Model
bizhub 423 Standard Standard Standard
bizhub 363 Standard Standard Option
bizhub 283 Option Option Option
bizhub 223 Option Option Option
2
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Type
Type Desktop/console *1 scanner/printer

Printing process Laser electrostatic printing system
PC drum type OPC drum: KM-1
Scanning density 600 dpi in main scanning direction x 600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Exposure lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
Platen Stationary (mirror scan)
OUTLINE
Original scanning Mirror scanning CCD optical system
* Sheet through system when DF-621 is used
Reading device CCD sensor
Registration Rear left edge
Paper feeding Manual bypass : Small roller separation system with torque limiter
separation system Tray 1 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 2 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Exposure system • 1 beam LD exposing system
• Polygon mirror scan system
Exposure density Equivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction x
600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Developing system Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system
Charging system DC comb electrode scorotron system
Neutralizing system Pre-charging + Red LED system
Image transfer system Roller image transfer system
Paper separating Neutralization needle bias superimposed voltage, separating claws and combi-
system nation of curvature system
Fusing system Roller fusing
Heating system Halogen lamp
*1: Only when the optional paper feed cabinet/desk is installed.
3
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.2 Functions
Types of original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects

Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17
Max. original weight Max. 2 kg
Multiple copies 1 to 9999
Warm-up time When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power
(at ambient tempera- switch remains ON for a predetermined period of time or more.
ture of 23° C/73.4° F 12 sec. or less
and rated source volt- When the main power switch is turned ON during the sub power switch being
OUTLINE
age) ON.
When hard disk is installed: 30 sec. or less
When hard disk is not installed: 25 sec. or less
Image loss Copy Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),
Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
PC print Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),
Trailing edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),
Rear edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),
Front edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
First copy time (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, full size)
bizhub 423/363 3.6 sec. or less
bizhub 283/223 4.2 sec. or less
Processing speed bizhub 423/363 173.0 mm/s
bizhub 283/223 140.0 mm/s
Copying/printing bizhub 423 1-sided: plain paper 42 copies/min (A4),
speed for multi-copy/ thick 13 copies/min(A4)
print cycle 2-sided: 42 copies/min (A4)
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11) 1-sided: plain paper 41.5 copies/min (8 1/2 x 11),
thick 13 copies/min (8 1/2 x 11)
2-sided: 41.5 copies/min (8 1/2 x 11)
bizhub 363 1-sided: plain paper 36 copies/min, thick 12.5 copies/min
2-sided: 36 copies/min
bizhub 283 1-sided: plain paper 28 copies/min, thick 10 copies/min
bizhub 223 1-sided: plain paper 22 copies/min, thick 9 copies/min
Fixed zoom ratios Full size x1.000
Reduction Metric area x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.866
Inch area x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785
Enlargement Metric area x1.154, x1.224, x1.414, x2.000
Inch area x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000
Zoom ratios
3 memories
memory
Variable zoom ratios ×0.250 to ×4.000 in 0.001 increments
4
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Paper size Tray 1 Metric area A3 to B5/B5S, A5S, 16K, 8K
Inch area 11 x 17 to 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S, 8 x 13
Tray 2 Metric area A3 to B5/B5S,16K, 8K
Inch area 12 x 18 to 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S, 8 x 13
Manual bypass tray Metric area A3 to A6S, A5, 16K/16KS, 8K
Inch area 12 x 18 to 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S,
4 x 6S, 8 x 13
Copy exit tray capacity Plain paper 250 sheets
OUTLINE
Thick paper 10 sheets
OHP film 1 sheet
External memory Supported external • USB flash memory compatible with the USB (1.1/2.0)
function memory devices interface
• Formatted to the FAT32 file system
• Memory capacity of 2GB or less recommended
(Possible to be non-operational for 4 GB or more)
• Not including security features
(Possible to turn OFF security features)
• A USB flash memory that appears as multiple drives on
a computer cannot be used.
5
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.3 Paper
Paper source (maximum tray capacity)

Type
Tray 1 Tray 2 Manual bypass tray
Plain paper ❍ (500 sheets) ❍ (500 sheets) ❍ (150 sheets)
(60 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb)
Translucent paper ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
OHP film ❍ (20 sheets)
⎯ ⎯
(crosswise feeding only)
Thick paper 1
OUTLINE
Copy paper (91 to 150 g/m2 ⎯ ⎯

type / 24.25 to 40 lb)
Thick paper 2
(151 to 210 g/m2 ⎯ ⎯
/ 40.25 to 55.75 lb)
Postcards ⎯ ⎯
Envelopes ⎯ ⎯ ❍ (10 sheets)
Labels ⎯ ⎯ ❍ (20 sheets)
Width 139.7 to 297 mm 139.7 to 297 mm 90 to 297 mm
Copy paper 5 1/2 to 11 3/4 inch 5 1/2 to 11 3/4 inch 3 1/2 to 11 3/4 inch
dimensions Length 182 to 431.8 mm 182 to 431.8 mm 139.7 to 431.8 mm
7 1/4 to 17 inch 7 1/4 to 17 inch 5 1/2 to 17 inch
Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) are
reliably fed.
Precautions regarding the use of paper

Do not use the following types of paper. Not observing these precautions may lead
to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine.
• OHP film that have already been fed through the machine
(even if they are still blank)
• Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
• Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
• Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
• Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
• Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface
• Treated paper such as carbon-backed paper, thermal paper, pressure-sensitive
paper, or iron-on transfer paper
• Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
• Paper of a non-standard shape (paper that is not rectangular)
• Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
• Paper with labels attached
• Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
6
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.4 Materials
Number of prints
Parts name Type name
(specification value)
Toner bottle bizhub 423/363 25,000 prints *1 TN414
bizhub 283/223 17,500 prints *1 TN217
Developer bizhub 423 120,000 prints DV411
bizhub 363 110,000 prints
OUTLINE
Drum unit bizhub 423 120,000 prints DR411
Developing unit bizhub 423 480,000 prints A1UD R711 XX
2.5 Print volume

• bizhub 423
Europe Average 10,700 prints/month
Maximum 60,000 prints/month
Except for Europe Average 8,300 prints/month
• bizhub 363
• bizhub 283
• bizhub 223
7
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.6 Machine specifications
Power requirements Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V

Current: 100 V 15 A
110 V 15 A
120 V 12 A
127 V 12 A
230 V 7A
Frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz
OUTLINE
Max power consumption 1,500 W or less

Dimensions ADF is installed 623 mm *1 (W) x 799 mm *2 (D) x 816 mm (H)
24.5 inch *1 (W) x 31.5 inch *2 (D) x 32.1 inch (H)
ADF is not installed 623 mm *1 (W) x 794 mm *2 (D) x 700 mm (H) *3
24.5 inch *1 (W) x 31.25 inch *2 (D) x 27.5 inch (H) *3
Space requirements 1,634 mm (W) x 895 mm (D) x 1,141 mm (H) *4
64.3 inch (W) x 35.2 inch (D) x 44.9 inch (H) *4
Weight bizhub 423/363 Approx. 78 kg / 172 lb
(except for developer and toner bottle)
bizhub 283/223 Approx. 66 kg / 145.5 lb
(except for developer and toner bottle)
*1: Width when the manual bypass tray is closed

*2: Including the control panel.
*3: Height up to the original glass
*4: When the sub tray of the finisher FS-527 and the paper feed tray is slide out, and ADF is
open.
2.7 Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30° C / 50 to 86° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour)
Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)
Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.
8
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.8 Print functions
Type Built-in printer controller

RAM 2 GB (shared with the main body)
HDD 250 GB (shared with the main body)
* Optional in some models and marketing areas.
SSD 1 GB
Interface Standard Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB2.0/1.1
Option USB 2.0
OUTLINE
Frame type Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet II, Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP,
FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP,
NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME,
IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD
Printer language PCL5c/6 Emulation
PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
XPS ver.1.0
Print resolution Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction ×
600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Printer fonts PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts
Supported computer IBM PC/AT compatible machine,
Macintosh
(PowerPC/Intel processor: Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5 for Intel processor)
Printer driver PCL KONICAMINOLTA Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
driver (PCL driver) Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition
(SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition
(SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *
* 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are
supported
9
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Printer driver PostScript KONICAMI- Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)

NOLTA driver (PS driver) Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
(SP1 or later)
(SP1 or later)
OUTLINE

supported
XPS KONICAMINOLTA Windows Vista Business *
driver (XPS driver) Windows Vista Enterprise *
supported
PostScript PPD driver Mac OS 9.2 or later
(PS-PPD) Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5
10
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Printer driver Fax driver Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later)
(SP1 or later)
(SP1 or later)
OUTLINE
supported
11
bizhub 423/363/283/223
2.9 Scan functions
Scanner Scannable range Same as the copier

(Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)
Scan speed 70 pages/min
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, DF
scan, 1-side original
Resolution 300 dpi)
Functions Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan to
WebDAV, Scan to BOX
Scanning resolution 200/300/400/600 dpi
OUTLINE
TWAIN Driver TWAIN Driver, HDD TWAIN Driver

Supported operating Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
systems Windows XP Home Edition (SP3)
Windows XP Professional (SP3)
Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a)
Windows Vista Home Basic (SP1)
Windows Vista Home Premium (SP1)
Windows Vista Business (SP1)
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP1)
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP1)
PC Conform to the specification of operating system
Required memory Conform to the specification of operating system
Network Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set
Hard disk Required 20 MB or more disk space
SMB Supported Windows Windows NT4.0 Server/Workstation
operating Windows 2000 Server/Professional
systems Windows XP Home/Professional
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Windows Server 2008
DFS function is supported only in the environment

that structured with the following Windows server
operating systems.
• Windows 2000 Server each edition
• Windows Server 2003 each edition
• Windows Server 2008
Direct hosting function apply to the following oper-

ating systems.
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
• Windows Vista
(IPv6 function is available only when the Windows
Vista is installed.)
Samba 2.2.x
3.x
Novell Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)
Netware
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
12
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 3. SECTION CONFIGURATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. SECTION CONFIGURATION
[1]
[2]
OUTLINE
[3]
[13] [14] [4]
[5]
[12]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10] [9]
A1UDT1C001DA
[1] DF-621 * [2] Scanner section

[3] Paper exit/switchback section [4] Fusing section
[5] Duplex section [6] Image transfer/separation section
[7] Registration section [8] Paper feed section (manual bypass tray)
[9] Paper feed section (tray 2) [10] Paper feed section (tray 1)
[11] Write section (PH section) [12] Developing section
[13] Toner supply section [14] Drum unit section
*: Option
13
4. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
4. PAPER PATH
• Machine equipped with a DF-621, FS-527, and PC-208.
OUTLINE
A1UDT1C002DA
14
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
5.1 Control block diagram
Scanner
section Inverter board Reverse
automatic
document
feeder
CCD board Scanner
relay board
Control panel
CONFIGURATION/
DC power supply
Secret boad
OPERATION
HDD
USB board
Authentication MFP board Fusing unit
unit Printer control
board Image transfer
FAX board section
Total counter Drum unit section
SSD Developing
section
High voltage unit

Main body
Paper feed
section
Laser drive Polygon motor
board Duplex section
Manual bypass
tray section
PH section Index board
Key counter Finisher Paper feed unit
A1UDT2E014DB
15
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.2 Image creation process
[1]
[12] [11] [14]
[2]
[13]
[10]
CONFIGURATION/
[9]
OPERATION
[5] [4] [3] [6] [7] [8]
A1UDT2C015DA
CCD • Light reflected off the surface of the original is converted to a correspond-
[1] (Photoelectric ing electric signal by CCD and the resultant electric signal is sent to the
conversion) MFP board.
[2] MFP board • The MFP board performs image processing.
• The image formed by a laser light with which the surface of the photo con-
[3] Photo conductor ductor is irradiated is changed to a corresponding electrostatic latent
image.
Photo conductor
[4] • Supply DC ( - ) charge on the photo conductor.
charging
PH • Expose photo conductor to a laser beam to develop electrostatic latent
[5]
(Laser exposure) image.
• The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the developer mixing cham-
[6] Developing ber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image formed on the surface of
the photo conductor. It is thereby changed to a visible, developed image.
[7] Paper feed • The paper is supplied from the paper feed cassette.
[8] Bypass paper feed • The paper is supplied from the manual bypass tray.
• A DC positive charge is applied to the image transfer roller to transfer the
[9] Image transfer
visible image on the surface of the photo conductor onto the paper.
• The charge neutralizing needle and separation claws remove paper from
[10] Paper separation
the surface of the photo conductor.
• The remaining toner left on the surface of the photo conductor is scraped
[11] Cleaning
off.
• The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with light, which neutral-
[12] Erase
izes any surface potential remaining on the surface of the photo conductor.
• The toner is permanently fused to the paper by the combination of heat
[13] Fusing
and pressure applied by the fusing roller.
[14] Paper exit • The paper is fed out face down onto the exit tray.
16
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.3 Image forming control
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] [21]
[11] [21]
CONFIGURATION/
[12]
OPERATION
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
A1UDT2C068DA
[1] Transport motor (M1) [2] PC motor (M2)

[3] Polygon motor (M5) [4] LD
[5] Paper exit sensor (PS3) [6] Charge
[7] Developing bias DC [8] Developing bias AC
[9] Erase lamp (LA) [10] Transfer
[11] Separation [12] Registration clutch (CL1)
[13] Registration sensor (PS1) [14] TOD
[15] Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11) [16] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)
[17] Power supply cooling fan motor (FM1) [18] Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3)
[19] Cooling fan motor (FM2) [20] Toner suction fan motor (FM4)
[21] Printing
17
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
5.4 Process speed

• The process speed is not changed according to the size or type of the paper. Instead, the
main body controls the intervals between sheets of paper (paper transport timing).
Process speed
bizhub 423
173 mm/s
bizhub 363
bizhub 283
140 mm/s
bizhub 223
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
18
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 6. INTERFACE SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6. INTERFACE SECTION
6.1 Configuration
6.1.1 Rear side 1
[6]
[5]
[4]
[]
CONFIGURATION/
[2]
OPERATION
[3]
A1UDT2C016DB
[1] Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) [2] Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1)
[3] Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) [4] USB port (Type A) USB2.0/1.1
[5] USB port (Type B) USB2.0/1.1 [6] Network connector
(10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T)
19
6. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
6.1.2 Rear side 2

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
A1UDT2E018DB
[1] Power code
20
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7. SCANNER SECTION
7.1 Configuration
[2] [1] [15]

[3]
[4] [14]
[5]
[6]
[13]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[7]
[12]
[8] [11]
[10]
[9]
A1UDT2E009DB
[1] Angle sensor (PS202) [2] Original size detection sensor/1 (PS204)
[3] Scanner motor (M201) [4] Inverter board (INVB)
[5] Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) [6] Scanner home sensor (PS201)
[7] Exposure unit [8] Mirror unit
[9] Machine condition monitor board (MCMB) [10] Lens
[11] CCD unit [12] Original cover switch (RS201)
[13] USB board (USBB) [14] CCD board (CCDB)
[15] Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205) *
*: Option
21
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4] [5]
A1UDT2C536AB
[1] Scanner motor (M201) [2] Scanner drive cable/R

[3] Scanner home sensor (PS201) [4] Mirror unit
[5] Exposure unit [6] Scanner drive cable/F
22
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 When the power is ON
1. The exposure unit moves from the scanner standby position to the home position.
2. The exposure unit moves from the home position to the shading position (under the
shading correction sheet) and stops (in scanning direction).
3. The exposure lamp turns ON and the gain value of the CCD sensor output voltage
to R, G, and B is adjusted.
4. After adjusting the gain value, a shading correction is performed. The exposure
lamp goes out when the correction is completed.
5. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the home position.
6. The exposure unit moves in the scanning direction and stops at the scanner
standby position.
[5]
[4] [3]
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[4] [3]
[6]
[7]
A1UDT2C537AA
[1] Scanning direction [2] Returning direction

[3] Scanner standby position [4] Shading position
[5] Home position [6] Scanner movement
[7] The exposure lamp (FL) turns ON and a gain
adjustment and shading correction are
made.
23
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed

A. Original scanning mode
• Original scanning mode has two types: Original cover mode and DF mode.
(1) Original cover mode
1. Turning the Start key ON will turn the exposure lamp ON (at the scanner standby
position).
2. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the shading posi-
tion. At the shading position, the gain adjustment is made.
3. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the scan start posi-
tion.
4. To start a scan, the exposure unit moves from the scan start position to the leading
edge of the image while performing shading correction.
The exposure unit will start reading the image from the leading edge of the image.
The exposure unit will finish reading the image at the trailing edge of the image.
5. The exposure lamp will be OFF when the reading is complete.
6. The exposure unit moves in the returning direction and stops at the home position.
Then the exposure unit moves in the scanning direction and stops at the scanner
standby position. It scans only once even for the color-scans, since R, G, and B
CONFIGURATION/
data will all be memorized in one scanning.

OPERATION
[5]
[6] [4] [3] [2] [1] [9]
[7] [8]
[6] [10]
[11]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [9]
A1UDT2C538AA
[1] Original [2] Scanner standby position

[3] Leading edge of the image [4] Shading position
[5] Scan start position [6] Home position
[7] Scan [8] Return
[9] Trailing edge of the image [10] Scanner movement
[11] Exposure lamp (FL) ON
24
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) DF mode
• The original fed by the reverse automatic document feeder will be read at the original DF
glass. The exposure unit will move to the reading position and stops. The original will be
read as it is transferred.
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
A1UDT2C539AA
[1] DF original glass [2] Reading position
25
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Original scanning control

• The light reflected off the exposed original reaches the CCD sensor via the lens.
• The CCD sensor outputs an electric signal (analog) that varies according to the intensity
of the light.
• One CCD sensor has a photoreceiver that individually responds to each of the three pri-
mary colors of R, G, and B.
• The electric signal is converted to digital data for each of R, G, and B by the CCD board,
becoming individual digital signals.
• Analog-to-digital conversion is made according to an instruction given by the MFP board.
[2] [1]
R
G
[3] B
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.7 µm
4.7 µm
A1UDT2C540AA
[1] CCD sensor [2] Scanning direction

[3] Sub scanning direction [4] Main scanning direction
(1) Calibration
The following adjustment and correction (calibration) are made before the original is
scanned, so that the image of the original can be adequately read. For details, see “20.
Image processing”.
See P.155
• Gain adjustment
• Shading correction
26
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.3.3 Original scanning area
• Original scanning areas vary depending on a scanning mode.
A. Original cover mode

• Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
• Sub scanning direction: Max. 431.8 mm
B. DF mode
• Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
• Sub scanning direction: Max. 1,000.0 mm
7.3.4 Original size detection control

A. Detection method
• For detection of the original size, the reflective original size detection sensors detect the
length of the original while the CCD detects the width of the original.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[7] [6]
[4]
[8] [9]
[3]
[10]
[1]
A1UDT2E010DB
[1] Exposure unit [2] CCD unit

[3] Original size detection sensor/1 (PS204) [4] Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205) *
[5] 346.1 mm [6] 318.0 mm
[7] Original read position [8] Original standard position
[9] Reverse automatic document feeder [10] Angle sensor (PS202)
*: Option
• For the original of an irregular size, the nearest standard size on the large side is applied
to it.
27
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Original size judgement
NOTE
• Table 1 or 2 can be selected in the Service Mode.
Criterion
Metric area & china area
Table 1
Original Main scanning width (mm)

size
detection 0~130.0 ~153.0 ~187.0 ~200.0 ~215.0 ~225.0 ~261.5 ~275.0 275.1~
sensor/1
No
OFF A5S B5S 16KS A4S B5 B5 16K A4
original
ON A3 - - - - FLS B4 8K A3
Table 2
CONFIGURATION/
Original
OPERATION
size
Main scanning width (mm)
detection
sensor
1 2* 0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~200 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~261.5 ~274.7 ~284.4 284.5~
No
51/2 × 16K 81/2 × 81/2 ×
OFF OFF origi- A5S B5S A4S - B5 16K A4
8 1/ 2 S S 11 S 11
nal
ON OFF A3 - - - - FLS FLS FLS - - - -
- ON A3 - - - - - 81/2 × 14 - B4 8K 11 × 17 A3
*: Option
Inch area
Table 1
Original size Main scanning width (mm)

detection
sensor/1 0~130.0 ~144.7 ~220.9 ~221.0
OFF No original 51/2 × 81/2 S 81/2 × 11 S 81/2 × 11

ON 11 × 17 - 81/2 × 14 11 × 17
Table 2
Original size
detection Main scanning width (mm)
sensor
1 2* 0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~262 ~284.4 284.5~
No
OFF OFF 5 /2 × 8 /2 S A5S
1 1
B5S A4S 8 /2 × 11 S
1
- B5 81/2 × 11 A4
original
ON OFF A3 - - - FLS FLS FLS - - -
- ON A3 - - - - 81/2 × 14 - B4 11 × 17 A3
*: Option
28
bizhub 423/363/283/223
7.3.5 Image processing
The image processing has following items. For details, see “20. Image processing”.
See P.155
Scanner section image processing block diagram
• Photoelectric conversion
• Analog-to-digital conversion
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
29
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)

8.1 Configuration
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8] [5]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
[7]
OPERATION
A1UDT2C519AA
[1] Laser aperture [2] G2 lens

[3] Index lens [4] Index board (INDEXB)
[5] Laser drive board (LASDB) [6] Collimator lens
[7] Cylindrical lens [8] Polygon motor (M5)
[9] G1 lens [10] Index mirror
30
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8.2 Operation
8.2.1 Laser exposure process
1. The laser light emitted from the semiconductor laser on the laser drive board is inci-
dent upon the polygon mirror via the collimator lens and the cylindrical lens.
2. The polygon mirror has seven faces, being turned at high speeds by the polygon
motor.
3. The light reflected off the polygon mirror illuminates the surface of the photo con-
ductor via the G1 lens and G2 lens.
4. The light reflected off the polygon mirror scans the surface of the photo conductor
as the polygon mirror rotates.
[1]
[2] [12]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[5] [11]
[6]
[7]
[8] [10]
[9]
A1UDT2C559AA
[1] Photo conductor [2] G2 lens

[3] Index mirror [4] G1 lens
[5] Polygon mirror [6] Polygon motor (M5)
[7] Cylindrical lens [8] Index lens
[9] Collimator lens [10] Laser drive board (LASDB)
[11] Index board (INDEXB) [12] Laser light scanning the surface of the photo
conductor (main scanning)
31
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
8.2.2 Laser emission timing

• The index sensor has a function of keeping the same laser light emission timing per
every one line in the main scanning direction.
• When a ready signal is detected after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after a
print cycle has been started, the MFP board outputs a laser ON signal.
• The laser ON signal triggers the firing of each laser light which illuminates the index
board via the polygon mirror, G1 lens, and index mirror. This generates an index signal.
• The index signal controls the laser light emission timing for each line in the main scan-
ning direction.
8.2.3 Advance polygon rotation

• To shorten the first print time, the polygon motor is energized before a print command is
issued.
• This timing starts when a original is loaded or a key on the control panel is pressed.
• If no print command is received during the advance energization, the motor is then deen-
ergized.
8.2.4 Laser emission stop

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Emission of the laser beam is stopped if any of the following conditions is encountered dur-
ing printing:
• At the end of a print job or a print job is interrupted by a paper empty condition or similar
event.
• The front door or any other door is opened.
• A misfeed occurs.
• A malfunction occurs.
8.2.5 Laser emission area

A. Main scanning direction
• The print start position in the main scanning direction is determined by the main scan-
ning print start signal (HSYNC) that is output from the MFP board and the width of the
paper.
• The laser emission area is determined by the paper size.
The area on either edge of the paper is, however, a void image area.
B. Sub scanning direction

• The print start position in the sub scanning direction is determined by the image write
start signal (VSYNC) that is output from the MFP board and the length of the paper.
• The laser emission area is determined by the paper size.
The area on either edge of the paper is, however, a void image area.
Void image area

Mode
Main scanning direction Sub scanning direction
3 mm/0.118 inches from the edge of the 4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the leading
paper edge of the paper
Copy
3 mm/0.118 inches from the edge of the 3 mm/0.118 inches from the trailing edge
paper of the paper
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the edge of 4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the leading
the paper edge of the paper
PC print
4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the edge of 4.2 mm/0.165 inches from the trailing
the paper edge of the paper
32
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1] [1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A1UDT2C560AA
[1] Void image area along the edge of the paper [2] Void image area along the leading edge of
the paper
[3] Void image area along the trailing edge of
the paper
33
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

9.1 Configuration
[4]
[3] [1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C516AA
[1] Toner bottle [2] Toner hopper

[3] Toner bottle motor (M3) [4] Toner bottle home sensor (PS4)
34
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.2 Drive
9.2.1 Toner bottle drive
[1] [2] [3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C518AA
[1] Toner bottle motor (M3) [2] Toner bottle home sensor (PS4)
[3] Toner bottle holder
9.2.2 Toner hopper drive
[1] [2]
[4] [3] A1UDT2C517AA
[1] Toner agitating blade/1 [2] Toner agitating blade/2

[3] Toner conveying screw [4] Toner supply motor (M4)
35
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Toner flow
• The TCR sensor mounted in the developing unit detects the T/C ratio in the developing
unit. Toner is supplied from the toner bottle to the toner hopper and from the toner hop-
per to the developing unit according to the T/C ratio detected by the TCR sensor and the
amount of toner consumed.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
[7]
OPERATION
[5] [6]
A1UDT2C595AA
[1] Developing unit [2] Toner bottle (cross-sectional view)

[3] Toner replenishing port [4] Toner hopper
[5] Toner supply motor (M4) [6] Toner conveying screw
[7] Toner flow
36
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.3.2 Toner replenishing mechanism
A. Toner supply from toner bottle to toner hopper
• The toner bottle motor provides the drive for replenishing toner from the toner bottle to
the toner hopper.
• Energization of the toner bottle motor results in the toner bottle being rotated. The toner
bottle is provided with a toner replenishing port. Load the toner bottle in the main body
with the toner replenishing port facing up. During rotation of the toner bottle through one
complete turn, toner is supplied to the toner hopper at timing at which the toner replen-
ishing port faces downward.
• The toner bottle home sensor detects the toner bottle at its home position (with the toner
replenishing port facing up).
B. Toner supply from toner hopper to developing section

• The toner supply motor provides the drive for replenishing toner from the toner hopper to
the developing section.
• Energization of the toner supply motor results in toner agitating blade/1 and toner con-
veying screw being rotated.
• Rotation of toner agitating blade/1 results in the toner in the toner hopper being agitated.
CONFIGURATION/
It also moves toner agitating blade/2 up and down, so that toner in the toner hopper is fed
OPERATION
onto the toner conveying screw.
• Toner agitating blade/2 is mounted with a magnet. The toner near empty switch mounted
on the outside of the toner hopper detects vertical movements of toner agitating blade/2
during a toner near empty condition.
• Rotation of the toner conveying screw results in the toner in the toner hopper being con-
veyed onto the developing unit.
[1] [2] [3] [5] [3] [2]
[4]
[5] [4] [1] A1UDT2C596AA
[1] Toner agitating blade/2 [2] Toner near empty switch (RS1)
[3] Magnet [4] Toner conveying screw
[5] Toner agitating blade/1
37
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.3.3 Toner replenishing control

• The toner replenishing control is performed through two different control modes: toner
replenishing control to the toner hopper and toner replenishing control to the developing
unit.
A. Toner replenishing control to toner hopper

• Only while the toner bottle motor is being energized, the toner near empty switch is used
to monitor the amount of toner still available for use in the toner hopper.
(1) Operation
1. Energization of the toner bottle motor is checked and, if it is found that the toner
bottle motor is energized, detection control is started.
2. Outputs from the toner near empty switch are monitored.
When the magnet on the toner agitating blade/2 lowers down to the position of the
toner near empty switch during energization of the toner bottle motor, the main
body determines that “toner in the toner hopper is decreasing”.
3. Having made the decision that the “toner in the toner hopper is decreasing”, the
main body rotates the toner bottle one complete turn to supply toner to the toner
CONFIGURATION/
hopper.
OPERATION
4. After the toner has been supplied to the toner hopper, the operation returns to step
1 and the output from the toner near empty switch is monitored. If the main body
determines a second time that the “toner in the toner hopper is decreasing”, the
toner bottle is rotated one complete turn and toner is additionally supplied to the
toner hopper. This operation is referred to as “continuous toner replenishing
sequence”. In the “toner near empty condition detection control”, the number of
“continuous toner replenishing sequences” is monitored and the toner near empty
condition is determined based on the number of sequences.
5. The above steps of operation are repeated to control the amount of toner in the
toner hopper.
NOTE
• If the front door is opened while toner is being supplied to the toner hopper, the
toner bottle motor is deenergized and the toner replenishing sequence is can-
celed.
38
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[6] [7] [1]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4] A1UDT2C597AA
CONFIGURATION/
[1] Toner agitating blade/2 (when the toner is full) [2] Toner agitating blade/2 makes a verti-
cal movement.
OPERATION
[3] Toner agitating blade/2 (when the toner decreases) [4] Toner near empty switch (RS1)
[5] Toner level (small amount of toner left) [6] Toner level (toner full)
[7] Magnet
B. Toner replenishing control to developing unit

• The amount of toner supplied is determined based on the result of detection made by the
TCR sensor.
(1) Detection process

• Only while the developing unit is energized (PC motor is energized), the T/C ratio in the
developing unit is monitored with the TCR sensor.
1. Energization of the PC motor is checked and, if it is found that the PC motor is

being energized, the detection process is started.
2. The output from the TCR sensor is monitored for a predetermined period of time
and the amount of toner to be supplied is calculated.
3. The toner supply motor is energized for the calculated “amount of toner to be sup-
plied (toner supply time)” and toner is supplied from the toner hopper to the devel-
oping unit.
9.3.4 T/C ratio recovery control

• When images that would consume a large amount of toner (images having a high image
density) are printed continuously, the T/C ratio in the developing unit may be reduced. In
such cases, toner is forcibly supplied.
• If the T/C ratio is decreased during a print cycle, that print cycle is interrupted and toner
is forcibly supplied.
• No print cycle can be run during the toner supply sequence.
• The toner supply sequence is terminated as soon as a predetermined value of T/C ratio
is recovered.
(Maximum 145 sec.: toner supply 116 sec. + developing unit agitation 29 sec.)
39
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.3.5 Manual Toner Add control

• A function of the Service Mode (Manual Toner Add) may also be used to supply toner
forcibly.
“Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / Manual Toner Add / Black”
• No print cycle can be run during the toner supply sequence.
• The toner supply sequence is terminated as soon as a predetermined value of T/C ratio
is recovered.
(Maximum 145 sec.: toner supply 116 sec. + developing unit agitation 29 sec.)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E046DA
40
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.3.6 Toner level detection control
A. Toner near empty detection control
• A toner near empty condition is detected based on the number of “continuous toner
replenishing sequences” (the number of times the toner bottle is continuously rotated) in
which toner is supplied from the toner bottle to toner hopper.
• The main body determines that there is a toner near empty condition when the number
of “continuous toner replenishing sequences” for the toner hopper reaches predeter-
mined number.
(1) Warning display function

• The warning screen to be displayed when a toner near-empty is detected can be enabled
or disabled in the “System 2 / Unit Change / Warning display” in the Service Mode.
• When the warning screen display is set to “Yes”, the message notifying the user that the
toner bottle needs replacing is displayed. (Replace toner bottle)
Printing can be continued even after the message is displayed.
• When the warning screen display is set to “No”, the message notifying the user that the
toner bottle needs replacing is not displayed. Printing can be continued without having
the message displayed.
CONFIGURATION/
• Approximately 600 printed pages can be produced in the standard job mode during the
OPERATION
period that begins when a toner near empty condition is detected and ends when a toner
empty condition is detected.
NOTE
• The number of printed pages represents a value that is calculated based the
amount of toner consumed when the machine is used in the standard job mode. It
varies depending on how the machine is used by the user.
• For details of the standard job mode, see “OUTLINE/ Materials” of Field Service.
A1UDT2E047DA
41
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Toner empty detection control

• The main body determines that there is a toner empty condition when any of the follow-
ing conditions is detected.
(1) Toner empty condition detected through monitoring the cumulative amount of
toner supplied
• The cumulative amount of toner supplied after the toner near empty condition has been
detected is monitored and, when a predetermined value is detected, the main body
determines that there is a toner empty condition.
(2) Toner empty condition detected based on detection of a malfunction of an

abnormally low toner density detected by TCR sensor
• When a malfunction of “C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected TCR sensor” is
detected after the toner near empty condition has been detected, the main body deter-
mines that there is, not a malfunction, but a toner empty condition.
(3) Toner empty condition detected based on a reduced T/C ratio

• If the T/C ratio remains below a predetermined threshold value after the completion of a
T/C ratio recovery control, the main body determines that there is a toner empty condi-
tion.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
C. Unit change function

• The warning screen to be displayed when a toner empty is detected can be enabled or
disabled in the “System 2 / Unit Change / Unit Change / Toner Bottle” in the Service
Mode.
• When the warning screen display is set to “User”, the message that prompts the user to
replace the toner bottle with a new one is displayed. (The toner needs to be replaced.
Follow the instructions to replace the toner bottle and close the supply door.)
• When the warning screen display is set to “Service”, the message that prompts the user
to call the service representative is displayed. (There is no toner. Contact your service
representative.)
A1UDT2E048DA
42
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D. Toner level display
(1) Toner near empty display (typical)
A1UDT2E049DA
(2) Toner empty display (typical)
[1] [2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E050DA
[1] Replaced by user [2] Replaced by service engineer
43
bizhub 423/363/283/223
E. Resetting the toner near empty and toner empty conditions

• Either the “toner replenishing control to toner hopper” or “toner replenishing control to
developing unit” is performed (both may be performed in some cases) if the toner bottle
is replaced with a new one after a toner near empty condition and a toner empty condi-
tion have been detected.
• The toner near empty/empty display is reset when the control is normally terminated.
• Initiation of a new print cycle is prohibited during execution of the “toner replenishing con-
trol to toner hopper” and “toner replenishing control to developing unit” after the toner
bottle has been replaced with a new one.
• See the relevant pages for more details of the “toner replenishing control to toner hopper”
and “toner replenishing control to developing unit”.
(1) Precaution when replacing toner bottle

• The toner bottle is not provided with any mechanism that detects the amount of toner still
available for use in the bottle. Therefore, make sure that the toner near empty or toner
empty message is displayed before replacing the new toner bottle. Do not replace with
the new toner bottle until the toner near empty or toner empty message is displayed.
• The toner amount data (level gauge) of the control panel determines that “Toner bottle is
replaced with new one” after toner empty status changes to the normal status, and the
CONFIGURATION/
“Toner amount data” is reset to zero.

OPERATION
Therefore, in cases where the toner bottle is replaced with a new one before the toner
near empty or toner empty message is displayed, the “Toner amount data” fails to be
cleared, which creates the conflicting indicators of “Toner amount data displayed” on the
control panel and the “Toner current level” in the toner bottle.
• Toner amount data displayed on the control panel may highlight the phenomenon of
toner still remaining in the toner bottle even though the toner empty indicator is activated.
[1]
A1UDT2E071DA
[1] Toner amount data (level gauge)
44
bizhub 423/363/283/223
9.3.7 Main body interior temperature measurement system
• The temperature/humidity sensor is located on the back panel of the main body. It is
used to measure the temperature and humidity inside the main body.
• The measured data is used as “environmental information” for various other types of con-
trol.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
A1UDT2C609AA
[1] Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUM)
45
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION)

10.1 Configuration
[1]
[2] [4] [5]
[2]
[8]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[6]
[7]
[3]
[3]
A1UDT2C561AA
[1] Imaging unit (IU) [2] Drum unit

[3] Developing unit [4] Recycling section
[5] Cleaning section [6] Photo conductor section
[7] Developing section [8] Charging section
46
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.2 Drive
10.2.1 Drum unit
[4] [2] [1]
[1]
[5]
[2] [5]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A1UDT2C521AA
[1] PC motor (M2) [2] Toner collecting screw/2

[3] Drum unit [4] Toner collecting screw/1
[5] Toner agitating roller
10.2.2 Developing unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
A1UDT2C523AA
[1] PC motor (M2) [2] Developing roller

[3] Toner conveying screw
47
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION (IU SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Outline
• The imaging unit (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and
developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing,
cleaning, and recycling sections.
• The developing unit is replaced once in four times of replacement of the drum unit and
developer.
Life
Model
Drum unit Developer Developing unit
bizhub 423 120,000 counts 120,000 counts 480,000 counts
10.3.2 Imaging unit detection

CONFIGURATION/
• The imaging unit of the main body consists of the drum unit and the developing unit that
OPERATION
are treated as one imaging unit.

• A signal from the TCR sensor is used to determine whether or not the imaging unit is
installed in the main body.
• If there is a signal, the main body determines that the imaging unit is installed in it.
• If there are no signals, the main body determines that the imaging unit is not installed in
it.
48
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
11.1 Configuration
[1] [2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[5]
[2]
A1UDT2C520AA
[1] Toner agitating roller [2] Separation claw

[3] Toner collecting screw/1 [4] Charge corona
[5] Photo conductor [6] Toner collecting screw/2
49
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.2 Drive
[4] [2] [1]
[1]
[5]
[2] [5]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A1UDT2C521AA
[1] PC motor (M2) [2] Toner collecting screw/2

[3] Drum unit [4] Toner collecting screw/1
[5] Toner agitating roller
• The PC motor provides the drive for the photo conductor which is rotated via the drive
gear.
• Toner collecting screw/1 and toner agitating roller are also driven by the PC motor via the
photo conductor.
• Toner collecting screw/2 is also driven by the PC motor via the photo conductor and toner
agitating roller.
50
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Charge corona control
• The comb electrode deposits a charge evenly across the surface of the photo conductor
through a grid mesh.
• The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh. This
results in the amount of ozone produced being smaller than with the wire electrode.
[2] [3]
[1]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
A1UDT2C562AA
[1] Charge corona [2] Comb electrode

[3] Grid mesh [4] Photo conductor
[5] Direction of rotation of photo conductor
51
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.2 Photo conductor cleaning mechanism

A. Cleaning using cleaning blade
• Part of the toner that is left on the surface of the photo conductor is scraped off by the
cleaning blade.
• The cleaning blade is not provided with any cleaning blade retraction mechanism. It is
pressed up against the surface of the photo conductor at all times.
[1] [2] [3]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
A1UDT2C563AA
[1] Toner collecting screw/1 [2] Toner agitating roller

[3] Cleaning blade [4] Photo conductor
B. Photo conductor backward rotation control

• When the gap between the photo conductor and cleaning blade is clogged up with for-
eign matter (paper dust, toner, etc.), the cleaning blade becomes unable to clean the sur-
face of the photo conductor properly, resulting in a faulty image (the cleaning blade fails
to remove toner completely).
• To prevent the cleaning blade from failing to remove toner completely, the photo conduc-
tor is rotated backward at predetermined time intervals. Turning the photo conductor
backward will let the foreign matter surface on the surface of the photo conductor. The
photo conductor is thereafter turned forward, so that the foreign matter can be removed
by the cleaning blade.
• Each time the cumulative time counter of the photo conductor exceeds a predetermined
time (equivalent to 100 printed pages of A4 paper), the PC motor is rotated backward
and forward, so that foreign matter (paper dust, toner, etc.) clogged in the gap between
the cleaning blade and the surface of the photo conductor can be removed.
52
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.3 Erase mechanism
• Part of the toner that is left on the surface of the photo conductor is scraped off by the
cleaning blade. A voltage is applied at this time to the cleaning blade to charge the sur-
face of the photo conductor, thereby making the surface potential uniform. The surface of
the photo conductor is thereafter irradiated with the light from the erase lamp, which neu-
tralizes any surface potential left on the surface of the photo conductor.
• The erase lamp is mounted on the main body frame.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
[2]
OPERATION
A1UDT2C043DA
[1] Erase lamp (LA) [2] Charge corona

[3] Photo conductor [4] Cleaning blade
53
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.4 Ozone suction function

• The comb electrode generates ozone as it discharges.
• When the photo conductor is exposed to a predetermined amount of ozone for a prede-
termined period of time, the sensitivity of the surface of the photo conductor becomes no
longer uniform, resulting in uneven sensitivity. Uneven sensitivity on the surface of the
photo conductor results in white bands or other print image defects.
• To prevent the photo conductor from developing the uneven sensitivity problem, the
ozone filter is mounted on the main body frame. The ozone filter removes ozone from the
air drawn by the cooling fan motor.
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
A1UDT2C567AA
[1] Ozone filter [2] Charge corona

[3] Photo conductor [4] Air flow
[5] Cooling fan motor (FM2)
54
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.5 Drum dry control
• The photo conductor is rotated idly without the system performing any image forming
processes (drum charge, exposure, erase, etc.).
• The drum dry sequence is automatically executed (for about 1 min.), if a predetermined
condition is met during the predrive after the power has been turned ON and when the
main body is reset from the sleep mode.
A. Manual drum dry control

• The manual drum dry sequence is run by pressing the start key in “Utility / Administrator
Settings / System Settings / Expert Adjustment / Drum Dry”. During the sequence, the
photo conductor is rotated for about 1 min.
• During the execution of the drum dry sequence, no print cycle can be run, but a print job
can be registered. The message “Drum Dry is on going. Please wait.” appears on the
control panel.
• The drum dry sequence may be terminated in mid operation by pressing the stop key.
• The manual drum dry sequence must be executed before the developing unit is replaced
with a new one or the developer is changed.
• For the procedures and other details, see “MAINTENANCE / PERIODICAL MAINTE-
CONFIGURATION/
NANCE PROCEDURE” of Field Service.
OPERATION
A1UDT2E033DA
55
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Auto drum dry control

• Ozone stagnant in the charging section may change properties of the photo conductor,
which results in a reduced initial surface potential and an increased potential after expo-
sure. As a result, there may be uneven densities between areas which face the charge
corona and those not.
• To eliminate such a phenomenon, an auto drum dry sequence is executed, if the power
is turned ON or the main body is reset from the sleep mode after the period of time dur-
ing which the PC motor remains deenergized exceeds a predetermined period of time
(six hours).
[1] [3]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C565AA
[1] Charge corona [2] Direction of rotation of photo conductor

[3] Photo conductor
• The setting for the auto drum dry function may be changed using “Service Mode / Sys-
tem 2 / Auto Drum Dry (the default setting is “No”).
A1UDT2E034DA
56
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.6 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor mecha-
nism
• The PC thermistor located immediately below the image transfer roller functions to mea-
sure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor inside the main body.
• The measured data is used for various controls.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[3]
A1UDT2C608AA
[1] Image transfer roller [2] Photo conductor

[3] Registration roller [4] PC thermistor (TH1)
57
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.7 Drum unit detection

• The developing mechanism of the main body consists of the drum unit and the develop-
ing unit that are treated as one imaging unit.
it.
• No new article detection functions are provided. If the drum unit is replaced with a new
one, therefore, the “Drum Unit Rotation Time counter” must be reset using “Service
Mode / Counter / Life”.
A. Drum unit rotation time

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E040DA
58
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.8 Drum unit life detection
• The life counter of the drum unit controls detection of life of the drum unit.
• The counter value is recorded in the service EEPROM of the main body.
Controlled item Counting unit

Drum unit rotation time *
M
*: M represents a code that denotes the drum unit rotation time.
A. Drum unit rotation time counter life determination

• If the counter value of drum unit rotation time reaches the threshold, the machine deter-
mines that the drum unit has reached a new state.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[8] [9]
A1UDT2C569AA
[1] Drum unit (new article) [2] Life threshold value

[3] Alarm threshold value [4] Life stop threshold value
[5] Normal display [6] L code display (Replacement alarm display:
Drum unit rotation time excess)
[7] Replacement alarm display [8] Image guaranteed range
[9] Outside image guaranteed range
59
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Drum unit rotation time counter life criteria
State Display Criteria

Normal Less than the drum unit rotation
Normal
(print enabled: within image guaranteed range) time threshold
Drum unit rota-
Equal to or more than the drum unit
tion time L code display
rotation time threshold and less than
excess (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range)
the replacement alarm threshold
(Reaching life)
Replacement Replacement alarm display rotation time replacement alarm
alarm (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range) threshold and less than the life stop
threshold
Life stop * Life stop display (print prohibited)
rotation time life stop threshold
*: Life stop may be disabled using “Service Mode / Enhanced Security / Life Stop Setting /
Stop”; however, print image quality is not guaranteed in this case.
For more details, see Service Mode, Field Service.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E036DA
60
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Drum unit life display
• The L code screen is displayed when the value of the drum unit rotation time counter
reaches the drum unit rotation time threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed
range).
• The life reaching screen is displayed when the value of the drum unit rotation time
counter reaches the replacement alarm threshold (print enabled, outside image guaran-
teed range).
L code Target unit L code Target unit

L-4 Drum unit L-6 Developer
L-7 Ozone filter L-8 Paper dust remover
L-9 Developing unit L-10 Transfer unit
L-11 Fusing unit
• The life stop screen is displayed when the value of the drum unit rotation time counter
reaches the life stop threshold (print prohibited).
(1) L code display (typical)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E044DA
[1] L code key [2] L code display (displayed when the L code key is touched)
(2) Replacement alarm display (typical)
A1UDT2E037DA
61
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Life stop display (typical)
A1UDT2E039DA
11.3.9 Life value of drum unit

NOTE
• The life of consumables varies depending on how the user uses the machine.
CONFIGURATION/
For details, see “3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS 3.4 Concept of parts life”
OPERATION
of Field Service.
Model Excess (reaching the life value) Replacement alarm Life stop
bizhub 423/363 3,921 M 4,313 M 4,901 M
bizhub 283/223 4,845 M 5,329 M 6,056 M
11.3.10 Ozone filter new article detection

• No new article detection functions are provided. If the ozone filter is replaced with a new
one, therefore, the “Ozone Filter Use Time counter” must be reset using “Service Mode /
Counter / Life”.
A. Ozone filter use time
A1UDT2E041DA
62
bizhub 423/363/283/223
11.3.11 Ozone filter life detection
• The life counter of the ozone filter controls detection of life of the ozone filter.

Number of printed pages produced using the cur-
Count
rently installed ozone filter
A. Ozone filter counter life determination

• If the number of printed pages produced using the currently installed ozone filter reaches
the threshold, the machine determines that the ozone filter has reached a new state.
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5] [6]
A1UDT2C592AA
[1] Ozone filter (new article) [2] Life threshold value

[3] Normal display [4] L code display (number of printed pages produced
using the currently installed ozone filter is exceeded)
[5] Image guaranteed range [6] Outside image guaranteed range
(1) Criteria based on the counter that counts the number of printed pages produced
using the currently installed ozone filter

Less than the threshold value of the
Normal number of printed pages produced
Normal
(print enabled: within image guaranteed range) using the currently installed ozone
filter
Number of
printed pages
produced Equal to or more than the threshold
using the cur- L code display value of the number of printed
rently installed (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range) pages produced using the currently
ozone filter is installed ozone filter
exceeded
(Reaching life)
63
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Ozone filter life display

• The L code screen is displayed when the number of printed pages produced using the
currently installed ozone filter counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled, outside
image guaranteed range).

L-11 Fusing unit

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E045DA
11.3.12 Life value of ozone filter

NOTE
of Field Service.
Model Excess (reaching the life value)

bizhub 423/363
150,000 counts
bizhub 283/223
64
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 12. DEVELOPING SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12. DEVELOPING SECTION
12.1 Configuration
[7]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
[4]
OPERATION
[8] [3]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
A1UDT2C522AA
[1] Developing roller [2] 1st toner conveying screw

[3] 2nd toner conveying screw [4] TCR sensor board (TCRSB)
[5] Toner filter (Developing unit side) [6] 3rd toner conveying screw
[7] Toner replenishing port [8] Toner collecting screw/2
[9] Toner agitating roller [10] Toner collecting screw/1
[11] Cleaning blade [12] Drum unit
65
12. DEVELOPING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
A1UDT2C523AA
OPERATION
[1] PC motor (M2) [2] Developing roller

[3] Toner conveying screw
• The developing roller is driven by the PC motor via the drive gear.
• The toner conveying screw is driven by the PC motor via the developing roller.
66
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Toner flow
A. Fresh toner
• Toner fed off from the toner hopper of the toner supply section is agitated and mixed with
the developer by the three toner conveying screws and conveyed onto the developing
roller.
B. Recycled toner
• The residual toner on the surface of the photo conductor after the image transfer is col-
lected by the photo conductor cleaning mechanism of the imaging unit and recycled back
to the developing unit for reuse.
• The cleaning blade pressed up against the surface of the photo conductor scrapes resid-
ual toner off the surface. The toner is then conveyed by toner collecting screws 1/2 to the
developer mixing chamber. Because the toner is thus recovered back to the developer
mixing chamber, there is no waste toner box mounted in the main body.
CONFIGURATION/
[2]
OPERATION
[1]
[2] [1]
[3]
[3]
[4]
A1UDT2C574AA
[1] Path of fresh toner supplied from toner [2] Path of recycled toner recovered from
supply section surface of photo conductor
[3] Photo conductor [4] Developing roller
67
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.2 Developing roller

• The developer (carrier and toner) in the developer mixing chamber is conveyed onto the
point of development by the toner conveying screws and the developing roller.
• The developing roller consists of an outer sleeve roller and an inner magnet roller.
[1] [2] [3] [4] A1UDT2C012DA

CONFIGURATION/
[1] 3rd toner conveying screw [2] 2nd toner conveying screw
OPERATION
[3] 1st toner conveying screw [4] Developing roller
12.3.3 HMT (High grade Micro Toning) development

• With the HMT method, the magnetic developer brush does not rub against the surface of
the photo conductor (the images). Accordingly, sharper line images can be reproduced,
involving no uneven image density at the trailing edge or thin lines and achieving even
finer reproduction of the solid image areas.
[1] [2]
A1UDT2C038DA
[1] Developing roller [2] Photo conductor
68
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.4 Developing bias
• The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is applied to the developing roller so that an adequate
amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the photo conductor.
• In addition to the negative DC component, AC voltage is applied during development to
help toner to be attracted more easily to the surface of the photo conductor.
[3]
[2]
[1]
A1UDT2C577AA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] Developing bias terminal [2] Developing roller
[3] Photo conductor
69
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.5 Developer scattering preventive mechanism

• To prevent the image and machine interior from being dirtied, the toner suction fan motor
draws air so that toner particles rising up in the developing unit can be trapped.
• A suction duct is provided for the IU (developing unit). As air is drawn by the toner suction
fan motor, toner particles rising up during development are removed from the air that
passes through the suction duct.
• The toner suction fan motor rotates when the PC motor is energized.
• The toner filter on the developing unit side and that on the main body rear side trap toner
particles from the air drawn by the toner suction fan motor.
[4] [5]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3] [2] A1UDT2C578AA
[1] Toner filter (developing unit side) [2] Toner suction duct
[3] Toner suction fan motor (FM4) [4] Toner filter (main body rear side)
[5] MFP board cooling fan motor (FM5)
70
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.6 TCR sensor control
• The TCR sensor is located on the underside of the developing unit. The sensor is a non-
contact magnetic type that measures permeability (bulk density) of the toner and carrier
to thereby detect the toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C).
• Adjustment of the TCR sensor is made when the developing unit or developer is
changed.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
A1UDT2C579AA
OPERATION
[1] 2nd toner conveying screw [2] 3rd toner conveying screw
[3] TCR sensor board (TCRSB) [4] 1st toner conveying screw
[5] Developing roller
A. TCR sensor adjust
A1UDT2E076DA
71
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.7 Developing unit detection

• The developing mechanism of the main body consists of the drum unit and the develop-
ing unit that are treated as one imaging unit.
it.
• No new article detection functions are provided. If the developing unit is replaced with a
new one, therefore, the “Developing Unit Rotation Time counter” must be reset using
“Service Mode / Counter / Life”. (Resetting “Developing Unit Rotation Time” will also
reset “Developer Replace Counter” and “Developer Use Time”.)
NOTE
• The following functions must be executed when the developing unit is replaced
with a new one:
➀ Before the developing unit is replaced with a new one, a manual drum dry
sequence must be executed using “Administrator Settings / System Settings /
CONFIGURATION/
Expert Adjustment / Drum Dry”.

➁ Before the developing unit is replaced with a new one, reset “Developing unit
OPERATION
rotation time” using “Service Mode / Counter / Life”.

➂ After the developing unit is replaced with a new one, adjust the TCR level using
“Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / TCR Sensor Adjust / Auto Adj. /
Black”.
A. Developing unit rotation time
A1UDT2E070DA
72
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. TCR sensor adjust
A1UDT2E076DA
C. Manual drum dry
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E033DA
12.3.8 Developing unit life detection

• The life counters of the developing unit and developer are used to control detection of the
life of the developing unit.

Developing unit rotation time M *
Developer use time M*
*: M is a code that denotes the developing unit rotation time and developer use time.
73
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A. Developing unit counter life determination

• Each of the developing unit rotation time counter and the developer use time counter has
its own threshold value. If the developing unit rotation time counter value and the devel-
oper use time counter value reach their respective threshold values, the main body
determines that the drum unit has reached a new state.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7]
[8] [9]
A1UDT2C569AA
CONFIGURATION/
[1] Developing unit (new article) [2] Life threshold value

OPERATION

[5] Normal display [6] L code display (Replacement alarm display)
(1) Developing unit rotation time counter life criteria

Normal Less than the developing unit life
Normal
(print enabled: within image guaranteed range) threshold
Equal to or more than the develop-
Developing
ing unit life threshold; and equal to
unit rotation L code display
or more than the developer use time
time excess (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range)
threshold and less than the devel-
(Reaching life)
oper replacement alarm threshold
Replacement Replacement alarm display
or more than the developer replace-
alarm (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range)
ment alarm threshold and less than
the developer life stop threshold
or more than the developer life stop
threshold
74
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A1UDT2E036DA
B. Developing unit life display

• The L code screen is displayed when the values of the developing unit rotation time
counter and the developer use time counter reach the life thresholds (print enabled, out-
side image guaranteed range).
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
L-11 Fusing unit
• The life stop screen is displayed when the values of the developing unit rotation time
counter and the developer use time counter reach the life stop thresholds (print prohib-
ited).
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E082DA
75
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A1UDT2E077DA

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E078DA
12.3.9 Life value of developing unit

NOTE
of Field Service.
Excess (reaching the Replacement

Model Counter Life stop
life value) alarm
Developing unit rotation
15,684M 15,684M 15,684M
bizhub 423/363 time
Developer use time 3,921M 4,313M 4,901M
Developing unit rotation
19,380M 19,380M 19,380M
bizhub 283/223 time
Developer use time 4,845M 5,329M 6,056M
76
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.10 Developer new article detection
• No new article detection functions are provided. If the developer is replaced with a new
one, therefore, the “Developer Unit Rotation Time counter” must be reset using “Service
Mode / Counter / Life”. (When “Developer Use Time” is reset, “Developer Replace
Counter” is incremented by one. “Developer Replace Counter” should not be reset.)
NOTE
• The following functions must be executed when the developer is replaced with a
new one:
➀ Before the developer is replaced with a new one, a manual drum dry sequence
must be executed using “Administrator Settings / System Settings / Expert
Adjustment / Drum Dry”.
➁ Before the developer is replaced with a new one, reset “Developer use time”
using “Service Mode / Counter / Life”.
➂ After the developer is replaced with a new one, adjust the TCR level using “Ser-
vice Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / TCR Sensor Adjust / Auto Adj. /
Black”.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Developer use time
A1UDT2E079DA
B. TCR sensor adjust
A1UDT2E076DA
77
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Manual drum dry
A1UDT2E033DA
12.3.11 Developer life detection

• The life counter of the developer controls detection of life of the developer.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Developer use time *
M
*: M represents a code that denotes the developer use time.
A. Developer use time counter life determination

• If the counter value of developer use time reaches the threshold, the machine deter-
mines that the developer has reached a new state.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7]
[8] [9]
A1UDT2C569AA
[1] Developer (new article) [2] Life threshold value

Developer use time excess)
78
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Developer use time counter life criteria

Normal Less than the developer use time
Normal
(print enabled: within image guaranteed range) threshold
Developer use Equal to or more than the developer
L code display
time excess use time threshold and less than the
(print enabled: outside image guaranteed range)
(Reaching life) replacement alarm threshold
Equal to or more than the developer
Replacement Replacement alarm display use time replacement alarm thresh-
alarm (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range) old and less than the life stop
threshold
Equal to or more than the developer
use time life stop threshold
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E036DA
B. Developer life display

• The life reaching screen is displayed when the value of the developer use time counter
reaches the life threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed range).
• The L code screen is displayed when the value of the developer use time counter
reaches the developer use time threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed
range).

L-11 Fusing unit
• The life stop screen is displayed when the value of the developer use time counter
79
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
A1UDT2E051DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E080DA
A1UDT2E081DA
80
bizhub 423/363/283/223
12.3.12 Life value of developer
NOTE
of Field Service.
bizhub 423/363 3,921M 4,313M 4,901M
bizhub 283/223 4,845M 5,329M 6,056M
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
81
13. IMAGE TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13. IMAGE TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION

13.1 Configuration
[2]
[1]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4] A1UDT2C524AA
[1] Image transfer roller [2] Charge neutralizing needle

[3] PC thermistor (TH1) [4] Registration roller
13.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
A1UDT2C019DA
[1] PC motor (M2) [2] Image transfer roller
82
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 13. IMAGE TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Image transfer roller control
• To transfer the toner image formed on the photo conductor onto the paper, the image
transfer voltage supplied from the high voltage unit is applied to the image transfer roller.
• Resistance of the image transfer roller changes with an environmental change, durability,
and other factors. To maintain an optimum output voltage, fixed current is passed through
the image transfer roller and the voltage being output at that time is detected. An appro-
priate image transfer voltage is determined based on the measured voltage and other
information such as “type of paper used”, “temperature and humidity”, and “1-sided/2-
sided”.
A. Execution timing
• The image transfer roller control is executed when a print job is received under any of the
following conditions:
“Main power switch is turned ON”
“Sub power switch is turned ON”
“The threshold value of a change in machine interior temperature is exceeded.”
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
13.3.2 Image transfer roller cleaning
• In order to remove the remaining toner on the image transfer roller, -/+ (DC) charge is
applied alternately to transfer the remaining toner on the image transfer roller to the
photo conductor.
• The cleaning blade then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the photo conductor.
[1]
*8
[3] [2]
A1UDT2C020DA
[1] Image transfer roller [2] Photo conductor

[3] Cleaning blade
83
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13.3.3 Image transfer current upper/lower limit control

• The image transfer voltage is determined through the image transfer roller control
depends on the environmental conditions. A manual fine-adjusting function is also avail-
able to achieve an even more optimum image transfer voltage for each type of paper. If,
however, a user uses two types of paper, one having resistance that greatly differs from
that of the other, the image transfer voltage is optimized so as to suit either one of the two
types of paper. In this case, an optimum transfer result is not obtained with the other type
of paper.
• In image transfer current upper/lower limit control, the current that flows through the
image transfer section during the print cycle is measured and the output voltage is auto-
matically controlled (by selecting Service Mode / Imaging Process Adjustment / Transfer
Voltage Fine Adj. / Auto) so that current that falls within an appropriate range flows. The
main body can therefore respond to widely ranging types of paper available in the market
without having to make fine-adjustments of the image transfer voltage.
• No manually adjusted values are valid during this control.
• [User Paper Settings] permits even more optimum image quality for a specific type of
paper. The image transfer current upper/lower limit control does not govern the type of
paper to which [User Paper Settings] is applied even during the execution of the control.
CONFIGURATION/
The result of manual fine-adjustments is therefore applicable to the specified type of

OPERATION
paper.
13.3.4 Charge neutralization and separation of paper

• To neutralize any residual potential on the paper which has undergone the image transfer
process, there is a charge neutralizing needle mounted on the guide plate after the
image transfer roller. The charge neutralizing needle applies an optimum separation out-
put bias voltage to the paper to separate it properly based on the information on the “type
of paper”, “temperature and humidity”, and “paper information (first side or second side)”.
[1] [2]
[1]
[2] HV
A1UDT2C072DB
[1] Charge neutralizing needle [2] Photo conductor
84
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13.3.5 Measure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor mecha-
nism
• The PC thermistor located immediately below the image transfer roller functions to mea-
sure the temperature of the area around the photo conductor inside the main body.
• The measured data is used for various controls.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] A1UDT2C606AA
[1] PC thermistor (TH1)
13.3.6 Image transfer roller new article detection

• No new article detection functions are provided. If the Image transfer roller is replaced
with a new one, therefore, the “Transfer Roller Unit counter” must be reset using “Service
A. Number of printed pages produced using the currently installed Image transfer
roller
A1UDT2E063DA
85
bizhub 423/363/283/223
13.3.7 Image transfer roller life detection

• The life counter of the image transfer roller controls detection of life of the image transfer
roller.

Number of printed pages produced using the
sheet
currently installed Image transfer roller
A. Image transfer roller counter life determination

• If the counter value of image transfer roller reaches the threshold, the machine deter-
mines that the image transfer roller has reached a new state.
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5] [6]
A1UDT2C592AA
[1] Image transfer roller (new article) [2] Life threshold value
[3] Normal display [4] L code display (number of printed pages pro-
duced using the currently installed image
transfer roller is exceeded)
(1) Transfer roller counter life criteria

Less than the threshold value of the
number of printed pages produced
Normal Normal (print enabled)
using the currently installed image
transfer roller
Number of
printed pages
produced
Equal to or more than the threshold
using the cur-
L code display value of the number of printed
rently installed
(print enabled: outside image guaranteed range) pages produced using the currently
image transfer
installed image transfer roller
roller is
exceeded
(Reaching life)
86
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Transfer roller life display
• The L code screen is displayed when the number of printed pages produced using the
currently installed Image transfer roller counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled,
outside image guaranteed range).

L-11 Fusing unit
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E064DA
13.3.8 Life value of image transfer roller

NOTE
of Field Service.

bizhub 423/363
150,000 counts
bizhub 283/223
87
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (MANUAL BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (MANUAL BYPASS TRAY)

14.1 Configuration
[12]
[13]
[1]
[11]
[9] [10]
[8] [2]
CONFIGURATION/
[3]
OPERATION
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
A1UDT2C510AA
[1] Manual multi FD sensor /3 (PS86) [2] Manual multi FD sensor /2 (PS85)
[3] Manual multi FD sensor /1 (PS84) [4] Paper side guide plate (front)
[5] Manual CD size sensor (VR81) [6] Manual separation roller
[7] Manual paper detection sensor (PS81) [8] Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)
[9] Paper side guide plate (rear) [10] Manual paper feed roller
[11] Manual paper empty sensor (PS82) [12] Manual lift-up position sensor (PS83)
[13] Manual pick-up solenoid (SD81)
88
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 14. PAPER FEED SECTION (MANUAL BYPASS TRAY)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
A1UDT2C511AA
[1] Transport motor (M1) [2] Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)
[3] Manual paper feed roller [4] Manual separation roller
89
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Up/down control
• The paper lift-up plate is moved up and down by the transport motor.
A. Up operation
• The manual pick-up solenoid is energized for a predetermined period of time during rota-
tion of the transport motor. This unlocks the paper lift-up plate clutch (mechanical) and
the driving force of the transport motor is transmitted to the paper lift-up cam.
• As the paper lift-up cam rotates, the paper lift-up plate which has so far been pushed
down by the paper lift-up cam is raised to the paper feed position by the spring.
B. Down operation
• The manual pick-up solenoid is energized for a predetermined period of time during rota-
tion of the transport motor. This rotates the paper lift-up cam, so that the cam pushes the
paper lift-up plate down into its standby position.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7] [6] [5] [4]
A1UDT2C525AA
[1] Manual paper feed clutch (CL81) [2] Manual lift-up position sensor (PS83)
[3] Manual pick-up solenoid (SD81) [4] Paper lift-up plate clutch (mechanical)
[5] Paper lift-up cam [6] Paper lift-up plate
[7] Spring
90
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Operation timing
(1) Move to paper feed position (up)
• At the start of a manual paper feed sequence, the paper lift-up plate is raised to the
paper feed position.
• After the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the manual pick-up solenoid is deener-
gized. The paper lift-up plate is stopped at the paper feed position.
• The manual lift-up position detection plate mounted coaxially with the paper lift-up cam
rotates in synchronism with the paper lift-up cam. When the paper lift-up plate is raised,
the manual lift-up position sensor which has been unblocked by the manual lift-up posi-
tion detection plate is blocked. Then, the machine determines that the paper lift-up plate
is raised to the paper feed position.
• If the manual lift-up position sensor remains blocked even after the manual pick-up sole-
noid has been deenergized, the machine determines that the paper lift-up plate is at the
paper feed position.
• As the paper level lowers during paper feed, the spring pushes up the paper lift-up plate,
so that the paper stack is pushed up to the optimum paper feed position.
(2) Move to standby position (down)
• The paper lift-up plate is lowered if there is no print job that uses the manual bypass tray
CONFIGURATION/
and the paper exit sensor detects a sheet of paper fed from the manual bypass tray.
OPERATION
• The paper lift-up plate is lowered if the above conditions are met even during execution of
another job.
• If a manual paper empty condition is detected at the paper feed position, the paper lift-up
plate is lowered to the standby position.
• If a paper misfeed occurs, the paper lift-up plate is stopped at the paper feed position.
When the transport motor rotates stably after the misfeed is cleared, the paper lift-up
plate is lowered to the standby position.
• After the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the manual pick-up solenoid is deener-
gized. The paper lift-up plate is stopped at the standby position. As the paper lift-up plate
lowers, the manual lift-up position sensor is unblocked. The main body determines that
the paper lift-up plate is at the standby position based on the fact that the manual lift-up
position sensor is unblocked even after the manual pick-up solenoid has been deener-
gized.
91
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C526AA
[1] Paper lift-up cam [2] Manual lift-up position detection plate
[3] Manual lift-up position sensor (PS83) [4] Paper lift-up plate
[5] Standby position [6] Paper feed position
92
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.3.2 Paper feed control
A. Pick-up control
• Paper feed operations of the manual bypass tray are driven by the transport motor.
• The manual pick-up solenoid is energized by a print start signal and the paper is raised
to the paper feed position.
• After the paper is raised to the paper feed position, the manual paper feed clutch is ener-
gized.
• When the manual paper feed clutch is energized, the drive from the transport motor is
transmitted to the paper feed roller, so that the paper can be fed in.
• The paper feed roller feeds the paper onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
• When the last sheet of paper for the print job fed from the manual bypass tray is trans-
ported onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller, the manual paper feed clutch is deener-
gized to stop the paper feed roller from rotating.
• If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor does not detect paper even after the lapse of a pre-
determined period of time, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed at the
manual bypass tray. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time if a paper mis-
feed is detected. If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect paper, the
machine determines that there is a paper misfeed at the manual bypass tray (paper feed
CONFIGURATION/
retry control).
OPERATION
• The manual pick-up solenoid is energized and the paper is lowered to the standby posi-
tion.
[1]
[3]
[2] [5]
[4]
[3]
[4]
A1UDT2C527AA
[1] Transport motor (M1) [2] Manual paper feed clutch (CL81)
[5] Paper
93
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Separation control
• The separation roller is pressed up against, and driven by, the paper feed roller. A torque
limiter is mounted on the shaft of the separation roller.
• The acting pressure of the paper feed roller/separation roller/torque limiter serves as the
limit torque for preventing double feed.
• When there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the separation roller
and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded and the separation roller follows the
rotation of the paper feed roller.
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and paper feed
roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the paper, so that the separation
roller stops rotating.
• Because of the stationary separation roller, the lower sheet of paper in contact with the
separation roller is not fed in, so that the first sheet of paper is properly separated from
the second sheet of paper.
C. Paper misfeed display
NOTE
• Different paper misfeed displays appear depending on the settings made in “Sys-
CONFIGURATION/
tem 2 / JAM Code Display Setting” of the Service Mode.

OPERATION
(1) Typical
A1UDT2E006DA
(2) System 2 / JAM Code Display Setting
A1UDT2E003DA
94
bizhub 423/363/283/223
D. Periodically replaced parts
• The paper feed roller and separation roller are periodically replaced parts. These two
rollers must be replaced with new ones at the same time.
• Neither the paper feed roller nor separation roller is provided with a new article detection
mechanism. When the two rollers are replaced with new ones, the “Manual Tray” counter
must be reset to zero using “Counter / Life” of the Service Mode.
• The number of times the manual bypass tray has been subjected to paper feed opera-
tions can be checked with the “Manual Tray” counter of the Service Mode.
Periodical replacement cycle Paper feed operations 200,000 times
• For details of the applicable replacement procedures for the paper feed roller and sepa-
ration roller and the Service Mode, see Field Service.
[1] [2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A1UDT2E007DB

[3] Service Mode/Counter reset screen
95
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.3.3 Paper size detection control

• The size of the paper loaded in the manual bypass section is detected by the combina-
tion of ON or OFF positions of the three manual multi FD sensors and the manual CD
size sensor.
• Moving the paper guide rotates the size detection gear and the manual CD size sensor’s
detector located on the same axis of rotation as the size detection gear. With the rotation
of the manual CD size sensor’s detector, a value is detected and used to calculate the
paper width.
Metric area
Paper size Manual multi Manual multi Manual multi Manual CD size sensor
detected FD sensor /1 FD sensor /2 FD sensor /3 Unit: mm
A6S 80 to less than 115
B6S 115 to 144 inclusive
OFF OFF OFF
A5 196 to 225 inclusive
B5 242 to 268 inclusive
A5S 133 to 164 inclusive
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B5S 169 to less than 196

A4S ON OFF OFF 196 to 255 inclusive
Letter (8-1/2 × 11) 255 to less than 288
FLS (8 × 13)* ON ON OFF 188 to 235 inclusive
Legal (8-1/2 × 14) 201 to 231 inclusive
B4 242 to less than 268
ON ON ON
Ledger (11 × 17) 268 to less than 288
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS (8 × 13).
8 × 13, 8.125 × 13.25, 8.25 × 13, 8.5 × 13, 8.65 × 13
96
bizhub 423/363/283/223
• Inch area
Paper size Manual multi Manual multi Manual multi Manual CD size sensor
detected FD sensor /1 FD sensor /2 FD sensor /3 Unit: mm
A6S 80 to less than 115
B6S 115 to 144 inclusive
Invoice OFF OFF OFF 201 to 231 inclusive
(5-1/2 × 8-1/2)
Executive
242 to 282 inclusive
(7-1/4 × 10-1/2)
Invoice S
(5-1/2 × 8-1/2 S)
Executive S
169 to less than 201
(7-1/4 × 10-1/2 S)
ON OFF OFF
Letter S
(8-1/2 × 11 S)
Letter (8- /2 × 11)
1
255 to less than 288
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Foolscap
ON ON OFF 188 to 235 inclusive
(8 × 13)*
Legal (8-1/2 × 14) 201 to 231 inclusive
B4 242 to less than 268
ON ON ON
Ledger (11 × 17) 268 to less than 288
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for Foolscap (8 × 13).
8 × 13, 8.125 × 13.25, 8.25 × 13, 8.5 × 13, 8.65 × 13
97
bizhub 423/363/283/223
[1]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
[4] [3]
A1UDT2C530AA
[1] Manual multi FD sensor /3 (PS86) [2] Manual multi FD sensor /2 (PS85)
[3] Manual multi FD sensor /1 (PS84) [4] Manual paper empty sensor (PS82)
[5] Manual CD size sensor (VR81)
98
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.3.4 Paper empty detection
• The manual paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition in the manual bypass
section.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
[3]
A1UDT2C531AA
[1] Manual paper empty sensor (PS82) [2] Actuator (Paper empty position)
[3] Actuator (Paper full position)
99
bizhub 423/363/283/223
14.3.5 Remaining paper detection control

A. Paper near-empty control
• The manual bypass tray is not mounted with any near-empty detection mechanism.
B. Paper empty control

(1) Paper conditions
• The manual bypass tray is provided with the manual paper empty sensor (interrupter-
type photosensor) and the manual paper detection sensor (reflector-type photosensor).
• The following three types of paper conditions are detected according to the combination
of the states of the manual paper empty sensor and manual paper detection sensor:
“Paper remaining”
“Paper not loaded in place”
“Paper empty”
(2) Manual paper empty sensor

• When the paper is loaded in the manual bypass tray, the paper empty detection actuator
is pressed and lowered by the paper. The paper empty detection actuator is lowered to
block the manual paper empty sensor.
CONFIGURATION/
• When there is no paper on the manual bypass tray, the paper empty detection actuator is
OPERATION
raised. The paper empty detection actuator is raised to unblock the manual paper empty
sensor.
[3] [2] [1]
A1UDT2C532AA
[1] Manual paper empty sensor (PS82) [2] Actuator (Paper full position)
[3] Actuator (Paper empty position)
100
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) Manual paper detection sensor
• When paper is loaded on the manual bypass tray, the manual paper detection sensor
detects whether or not there is paper.
If the paper lift-up plate is located at the standby position (lower position), however, the
detection result is not incorporated under any of the following conditions because of the
limited detection range of the manual paper detection sensor.
“At the start of paper feed from the manual bypass tray”
“The power switch is turned ON”
“The machine exits the sleep mode”
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
A1UDT2C533AA
[1] Manual paper detection sensor (PS81)
(4) Paper condition determination conditions
Paper conditions Manual paper empty sensor (PS82) Manual paper detection sensor (PS81)
Paper remaining Blocked (Paper remaining) Paper remaining
Paper not loaded in
Blocked (Paper remaining) No paper
place
Paper remaining
Paper empty Unblocked (No paper)
No paper
101
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Paper empty and paper set failure displays
A1UDT2E008DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
102
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 15. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY 1/TRAY 2)
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY 1/TRAY 2)
15.1 Configuration
15.1.1 Tray 1
A. Electrical parts configuration
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[4]
[9] [5]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[8]
[7]
A1UDT2C500AA
[1] Transport motor (M1) [2] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)
[3] Tray 1 near empty sensor (PS14) [4] Tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS12)
[5] Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11) * [6] Tray 1 paper empty sensor (PS15)
[7] Tray 1 paper CD size detect sensor/2 (PS17) [8] Tray 1 paper CD size detect sensor/1 (PS16)
[9] Tray 1 paper FD sensor board (PSDB11) [10] Tray 1 detection sensor (PS13)
[11] Tray 1 lift-up motor (M11)
*: Dedicated to bizhub 423. bizhub 423 has a faster paper feed speed than bizhub 363/283/
223 and a short distance between sheets of paper. The paper feed sensor is installed for
paper feed control purposes.
103
15. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY 1/TRAY 2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Mechanical parts configuration
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C501AA
[1] Tray 1 pick-up roller [2] Tray 1 paper feed roller

[3] Tray 1 separation roller [4] Tray 1 paper lift-up plate
[5] Paper guide (CD) [6] Paper guide (FD)
[7] Paper length detection plate
104
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.1.2 Tray 2
A. Electrical parts configuration
[1]
[12]
[10] [11]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[8] [4]
CONFIGURATION/
[7]
OPERATION
[5]
[6]
A1UDT2C502AA
[1] Tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL22) [2] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) *1
[3] 2 [4] Tray 2 paper empty sensor (PS25)
Tray 2 paper feed sensor (PS21) *
[5] Tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS22) [6] Tray 2 paper CD size detect sensor/2 (PS27)
[7] Tray 2 paper CD size detect sensor/1 (PS26) [8] Tray 2 paper FD sensor board (PSDB21)
[9] Tray 2 detection sensor (PS23) [10] Tray 2 lift-up motor (M21)
[11] Tray 2 near empty sensor (PS24) [12] Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL21)
*1: The type of the sensor differs between bizhub 363/283/223 and bizhub 423. bizhub 423
incorporates a reflector type and, as a result, is not provided with any actuator for
detecting paper feed.
*2: Dedicated to bizhub 423.
105
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Mechanical parts configuration
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[7]
[6]
A1UDT2C503AA
[1] Tray 2 vertical transport roller [2] Tray 2 paper feed roller
[3] Tray 2 separation roller [4] Tray 2 pick-up roller
[5] Tray 2 paper lift-up plate [6] Paper guide (CD)
[7] Paper guide (FD) [8] Paper length detection plate
106
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
CONFIGURATION/
[8]
OPERATION
[9]
[10] A1UDT2C504AA
[1] Transport motor (M1) [2] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL11)
[3] Tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL22) [4] Tray 1 pick-up roller
[5] Tray 1 paper feed roller [6] Tray 1 separation roller
[7] Tray 2 vertical transport roller [8] Tray 2 paper feed roller
[9] Tray 2 separation roller [10] Tray 2 pick-up roller
[11] Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL21)
• The drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray 1 and tray 2. If the description that
follows is not identified with tray 1 or tray 2, it is applicable to both tray 1 and tray 2 in
terms of mechanism and control.
• The transport motor of each paper feed tray drive the tray 1 and tray 2 paper feed roller
section.
• The drive section of each paper feed tray has a clutch that controls rotation of the paper
feed roller section.
107
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.2.1 Layout of sensors and rollers
[1]
[15] [16] [2]
[14] [3]
[4]
[13]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
[12]
OPERATION
[6]
[11] [10] [9] [8] [7]
A1UDT2C505AA
[1] Registration roller [2] Registration sensor (PS1)

[3] Paper transport to image transfer section [4] Paper transport in vertical transport section
[5] Manual bypass tray [6] Manual paper feed roller
[7] Paper transport from manual bypass tray [8] Paper transport from optional paper feed
cabinet
[9] Paper transport from tray 2 [10] Tray 2
[11] Tray 2 paper feed roller/ [12] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28) *2
Tray 2 paper feed sensor (PS21) *1
[13] Tray 2 vertical transport roller [14] Paper transport from tray 1
[15] Tray 1 [16] Tray 1 paper feed roller/
Tray 1 paper feed sensor (PS11) *1
*1: Dedicated to bizhub 423.

*2: The type of the sensor and the position at which the sensor is disposed differ between
bizhub 363/283/223 and bizhub 423. (The illustration shows, as an example, the loca-
tion of the sensor in bizhub 423.)
bizhub 423 incorporates a reflector type and, as a result, is not provided with any actua-
tor for detecting paper feed.
108
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.3 Operation
• Tray 1 and tray 2 are controlled in the same control procedure.
A. Up operation
• The paper lift-up plate B is located under the paper lift-up plate A.
• The lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is connected to the paper lift-up plate B.
• When the drive shaft of the lift-up motor rotates, the paper lift-up plate B raises the paper
lift-up plate A.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3] [2]
A1UDT2C998AA
[1] Lift-up motor (M11/M21) [2] Paper lift-up plate B

[3] Paper lift-up plate A [4] Upper limit sensor (PS12/PS22)
(1) Upper position
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[4] [3]
[5]
A1UDT2C996AB
[1] Actuator of upper limit Upper position [2] Light blocking plate of Lower position
sensor (Paper full) upper limit sensor (Unblocked)
[3] Paper lift-up plate A Upper position [4] Upper limit sensor Unblocked
(PS12/PS22)
[5] Paper lift-up plate B Upper position
109
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Down operation
• When the paper feed tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the lift-up motor and
the lift-up plate drive shaft are disconnected from each other.
• When the driving force of the lift-up motor is released from the lift-up plate drive shaft, the
paper lift-up plate starts lowering by its own weight.
(1) Down position
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[5]
[3]
A1UDT2C995AB
[1] Actuator of upper limit Lower position [2] Light blocking plate of Upper position
sensor (Low paper level upper limit sensor (Blocked)
or open paper
feed tray)
[3] Paper lift-up plate A Lower position [4] Upper limit sensor Blocked
(PS12/PS22)
[5] Paper lift-up plate B Lower position
110
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Operation timing
(1) When the paper feed tray is slid in
• When the paper feed tray is slid into the machine, the tray detection sensor is blocked.
The machine then determines that the paper feed tray is slid into position.
• The paper lift-up plate is at the lower position when the paper feed tray is slid out, so that
the upper limit sensor is unblocked.
• Determining that the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the lift-up motor
rotate to start the up operation of the paper lift-up plate.
• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the
paper lift-up plate has been started, the upper limit sensor is blocked.
• Determining that the upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up motor to
complete the up operation of the paper lift-up plate.
• Control is provided to make sure that only one paper feed tray performs the up operation
at one time.
• If the paper feed tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lift-up plate and
accordingly the tray detection sensor is unblocked, the up operation of the paper lift-up
plate is terminated.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
A1UDT2C997AA
[1] Paper feed tray [2] Detection plate

[3] Tray detection sensor (PS13/PS23) [4] Near empty sensor (PS14/PS24)
(2) During a print cycle

• When the amount of paper decreases as the machine keeps printing, the pick-up roller
will gradually come down to unblock the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate
again to lift up the paper lift-up plate.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to complete the up
operation of the paper lift-up plate.
• The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep the constant pressure (paper
take-up pressure) between the pick-up roller and the paper stack regardless of the
amount of paper still available for use.
111
bizhub 423/363/283/223

• Tray 1 and tray 2 are controlled in the same control procedure.
A. Pick-up control
• The paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after
the print start signal.
• The driving force of the transport motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and paper feed
roller when the paper feed clutch is energized. These rollers rotate to pick up and feed a
sheet of paper into the machine.
• The separation roller is pressed up against, and driven by, the paper feed roller. A torque
limiter is mounted on the shaft of the separation roller.
and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded and the separation roller follows the
CONFIGURATION/
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and paper feed
OPERATION
roller stops rotating.
• Because of the stationary separation roller, the lower sheet of paper in contact with the
separation roller is not fed in, so that the first sheet of paper is properly separated from
the second sheet of paper.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] A1UDT2C994AA
[1] Pick-up roller [2] Paper feed roller

[3] Separation roller [4] Paper
112
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Paper feed roller section noise reduction mechanism
• During a paper separation sequence, the paper feed roller may vibrate to produce a
large operating noise. To reduce the operating noise, the rotation shaft of the paper feed
roller is mounted with a paper feed roller spring.
[2]
[5] [4] [3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] A1UDT2C975AA
[1] Paper feed roller section [2] Pick-up roller

[3] Paper feed roller spring [4] Separation roller
[5] Paper feed roller
D. Paper feed retry control

• If the specified sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predeter-
mined period of time after the start of the paper feed sequence, the machine determines
that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a
paper misfeed is detected in a print job. A paper misfeed results if the specified sensor is
still unable to detect the paper even after the paper feed retry sequence, the machine
determines that there is a paper misfeed.
Paper feed
Paper port Sensor name
retry control
❍ Manual bypass tray Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
❍ Tray 1 Registration sensor (PS1)
❍ Tray 2 Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
❍ Tray 3 (Option: PC-109/208) Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS36)
❍ Tray 4 (Option: PC-208) Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS46)
X Tray 3 (Option: PC-409) No paper feed retry control is performed.
113
bizhub 423/363/283/223
E. Paper feed speed reduction control

(1) bizhub 423 (Tray 1/Tray 2)
• If there is a small paper-to-paper distance relative to the preceding sheet of paper when
the current sheet of paper reaches the paper feed sensor during a multi-print cycle, the
paper feed clutch is temporarily deenergized to thereby retard the paper feed timing of
the current sheet of paper. An appropriate paper-to-paper distance can thereby be
ensured.
(2) bizhub 423 (Manual bypass tray)

the current sheet of paper reaches the tray 2 vertical transport sensor during a multi-print
cycle, the paper feed clutch is temporarily deenergized to thereby retard the paper feed
timing of the current sheet of paper. An appropriate paper-to-paper distance can thereby
be ensured.
(3) bizhub 363/283/223 (Tray 2/Manual bypass tray)
the current sheet of paper reaches the tray 2 vertical transport sensor during a multi-print
cycle, the paper feed clutch is temporarily deenergized to thereby retard the paper feed
CONFIGURATION/
timing of the current sheet of paper. An appropriate paper-to-paper distance can thereby
OPERATION
be ensured.
• The paper feed speed reduction control is not performed for continuous paper feeding
from tray 1, because, in this case, the paper does not move past the tray 2 vertical trans-
port sensor. (The paper feed sensor is mounted only on bizhub 423.)
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
A1UDT2C977AA
[1] Preceding sheet [2] Paper-to-paper distance

[3] Paper feed sensor (PS11/PS21) [4] Sheet of paper being controlled
114
bizhub 423/363/283/223
F. Paper feed control
(1) Tray 1
• The tray 1 paper feed roller feeds the paper onto the registration roller.
• The tray 1 paper feed sensor located downstream of the tray 1 paper feed roller detects
the paper fed from the tray 1 paper feed roller. If the paper feed timing of the paper fed
from the tray 1 paper feed roller is earlier than a predetermined value, the tray 1 paper
feed clutch is deenergized to correct the paper feed timing. For more details, see “Paper
feed speed reduction control.” (The paper feed sensor is mounted on bizhub 423 only.)
• When the paper fed from the tray 1 paper feed roller moves past the registration roller
and reaches a predetermined position, the tray 1 paper feed clutch is deenergized to dis-
connect the driving force of the transport motor. The tray 1 pick-up roller and tray 1 paper
feed roller follow the movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 1 pick-up roller
and tray 1 paper feed roller stop rotating as soon as the paper moves past them.
• If the registration sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predeter-
mined period of time, the main body determines that there is a paper misfeed. The paper
feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is detected (paper feed
retry control). If the registration sensor is still unable to detect the paper, the main body
determines that there is a paper misfeed at tray 1 and displays the message of “PAPER
CONFIGURATION/
JAM” on the control panel.
OPERATION
• For details of paper misfeed detection conditions, see “Service Manual / Field Service /
TROUBLESHOOTING / List of JAM code” for the main body.
115
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Tray 2
• The tray 2 paper feed roller feeds the paper onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
• The tray 2 paper feed sensor located downstream of the tray 2 paper feed roller detects
the paper fed from the tray 2 paper feed roller. If the paper feed timing of the paper fed
from the tray 2 paper feed roller is earlier than a predetermined value, the tray 2 paper
feed clutch is deenergized to correct the paper feed timing. For more details, see “Paper
feed speed reduction control.” (The paper feed sensor is mounted on bizhub 423 only.)
• When the tray 2 vertical transport sensor detects the leading edge of the paper fed from
the tray 2 paper feed roller, the tray 2 paper feed clutch is deenergized to disconnect the
driving force of the transport motor. The tray 2 pick-up roller and tray 2 paper feed roller
follow the movement of the paper, continuing rotating. The tray 2 pick-up roller and tray 2
paper feed roller stop rotating as soon as the paper moves past them.
• Different models of bizhub use different types of the tray 2 vertical transport sensor.
bizhub 423 incorporates a reflector type. As the paper moves past the sensor, the sensor
receives a sensor light reflected off the paper. The main body thereby determines that a
sheet of paper has moved past the sensor.
bizhub 363/283/223 incorporates an interrupter type. When the paper moves past the
sensor, the leading edge of the paper pushes the actuator. This blocks or unblocks the
CONFIGURATION/
sensor light, so that the main body determines that a sheet of paper has moved past the
OPERATION
sensor.
bizhub 423 uses the reflector type, because it transports paper at higher speeds than the
other models.
[1] [3]
[2] [4]
A1UDT2C974AA
[1] Tray 2 vertical transport roller [2] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
(For bizhub 423)
[3] Actuator of tray 2 vertical transport sensor [4] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
(For bizhub 363/283/223) (For bizhub 363/283/223)
• If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the main body determines that there is
a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed
is detected (paper feed retry control). If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is still unable
to detect the paper, the main body determines that there is a paper misfeed at tray 2.
TROUBLESHOOTING / List of JAM code” for the main body.
116
bizhub 423/363/283/223
G. Paper misfeed display
NOTE
tem 2 / JAM Code Display Setting” of the Service Mode.
(1) Tray 1 (typical)
CONFIGURATION/
A1UDT2E001DA
OPERATION
(2) Tray 2 (typical)
A1UDT2E002DA
(3) System 2 / JAM Code Display Setting
A1UDT2E003DA
117
bizhub 423/363/283/223
H. Downstream exit control during multi-print cycle

• The following terms are used for convenience’ sake throughout this chapter.
Upstream: Refers to the source side of paper supply relative to the paper feeding direc-
tion
Downstream: Refers to the destination side of paper transport relative to the paper feed-
ing direction
• If a paper misfeed occurs at the paper feed section which is upstream in paper transport,
the print cycle is not brought to an immediate stop; rather, the machine allows a sheet of
paper, for which the print cycle is to be completed at a downstream side, to continue
undergoing the current print cycle and feeds the printed page out after completion of the
current print cycle.
(1) Types of paper misfeed governed by downstream exit control
Misfeed at tray 1 Misfeed at tray 2

Misfeed at tray 3 (PC-208) Misfeed at tray 3 (PC-409) *
Misfeed at tray 4 (PC-208) Misfeed at manual bypass tray section
Misfeed at vertical transport section
CONFIGURATION/
*: Excluding “misfeed at tray 3” when the main body is mounted with the optional paper
OPERATION
feed cabinet PC-409
118
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(2) Paper pass (In the case of the tray 2)
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[14] [5]
[13]
[6]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[9]
CONFIGURATION/
[11] [10]
OPERATION
A1UDT2C976AA
[1] Paper exit/switchback roller [2] Duplex transport roller/1

[3] Pressure roller [4] Duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92)
[5] Duplex transport roller/2 [6] Image transfer roller
[9] Duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) [10] Duplex transport roller/3
[11] Transport paper from paper feed section [12] Photo conductor
(tray 2)
[13] Heating roller [14] Paper exit sensor (PS3)
119
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(3) 1-sided printing

1. Operation 1
[1] • In consecutive 1-sided printing, the 4th
[2] sheet causes a jamming at the paper
feed tray section. [3]
[4] • The 1st sheet after an image transfer
is remained at the fusing section and
the paper exit section. [4]
• The 2nd sheet before an image trans-
fer is remained at the vertical convey-
ance section and the registration
section. [5]
• The 3rd sheet before an image trans-
[5] fer is remained at the paper feed sec-
[6] tion and the registration section. [6]
[1] Sheet before a 1-sided image transfer

[3]
[2] Sheet after a 1-sided image transfer
CONFIGURATION/
[3] 4th sheet: Jamming

OPERATION
[4] 1st sheet

[5] 2nd sheet
[6] 3rd sheet
A1UDT2C986AC
2. Operation 2
• Stop the feeding and conveying opera-
tion of the 4th sheet. [1]
• Exit the 1st sheet. [2]
[3] • Transfer/fuse images on the 2nd
sheet. [3]
[2] • Convey the 3rd sheet to transfer
images. [4]
[4]
[1]
A1UDT2C985AA
120
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. Operation 3
• Exit the 2nd sheet. [1]
• Fuse the 3rd sheet to exit paper. [2]
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C984AA
121
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(4) 2-sided printing

1. Operation 1
[1] • In consecutive 2-sided printing, the 4th
[2] sheet causes a jamming at the paper
[3] feed tray section. [4]
[5]
• The 1st sheet after a 2-sided image
transfer is remained at the paper exit
section. [5]
• The 2nd sheet after a 1-sided image
[6] fusing is remained at the duplex sec-
tion. [6]
• The 3rd sheet before an image trans-
fer is remained at the vertical convey-
[7] ance section and the registration
section. [7]
[1] Sheet before a 1-sided image transfer

[4]
CONFIGURATION/

OPERATION
[4] 4th sheet: Jamming

[5] 1st sheet
[6] 2nd sheet
A1UDT2C983AA
[7] 3rd sheet
2. Operation 2
• Stop the feeding and conveying opera-
tion of the 4th sheet. [1]
• Exit the 1st sheet. [2]
• Transfer/fuse 2-sided images on the
[4] 2nd sheet. [3]
[2] • Transfer/fuse 1-sided images on the
3rd sheet to convey it to the duplex
[3] section. [4]
[1]
A1UDT2C982AA
122
bizhub 423/363/283/223
3. Operation 3
• Exit the 2nd sheet. [1]
• Stop the 3rd sheet at the duplex sec-
tion. [2]
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C981AA
Operation 4
• The 3rd sheet of paper left in the duplex section should be removed by opening the
duplex section cover.
NOTE
• 3rd sheets are conveyed to the duplex section which allowed removing a jamming
easily. 2-sided images are not printed on a sheet conveyed to the duplex section.
123
bizhub 423/363/283/223
I. Periodically replaced parts

• The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller are periodically replaced parts.
These three rollers must be replaced with new ones at the same time.
• None of the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller is provided with a new
article detection mechanism. When the three rollers are replaced with new ones, the
“1st.” or “2nd.” counter must be reset to zero using “Counter / Life” of the Service Mode.
• The number of times tray 1/tray 2 has been subjected to paper feed operations can be
checked with the “1st./2nd.” counter of the Service Mode.
• For details of the applicable replacement procedures for the pick-up roller, paper feed
roller, and separation roller and the Service Mode, see Field Service.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E004DB
[1] Paper feed roller/Pick-up roller/Separation roller [2] Service Mode/Counter reset screen
124
bizhub 423/363/283/223
• The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of paper
CD size detect sensor/1 and paper CD size detect sensor/2 being unblocked or blocked.
• The paper CD size detect sensor/1 and paper CD size detect sensor/2 are unblocked or
blocked by the paper width detection plate provided in the paper width guide plate.

• The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or
OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on the paper FD sensor board.
• Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate con-
nected to the paper length guide plate.
[1] [2] [3]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
A1UDT2C992AA
[1] Paper CD size detect sensor/2 (PS17/PS27) [2] Tray detection sensor (PS13/PS23)
[3] Paper CD size detect sensor/1 (PS16/PS26) [4] Detection plate
[7] Switch 4 (SW4) [8] Switch 3 (SW3)
[11] Paper FD sensor board (PSDB11/PSDB21)
125
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Paper size determination

• Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will
decide a paper size.
Paper FD sensor board Paper CD size Paper CD size

Paper size
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 detect sensor/1 detect sensor/2
A3 OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF Blocked Unblocked
B4 OFF OFF OFF ON Blocked Unblocked
A4S ON ON/OFF OFF OFF Unblocked Unblocked
A4 ON/OFF ON ON ON Blocked Unblocked
B5S ON ON OFF ON Unblocked Unblocked
B5 OFF OFF ON ON Blocked Unblocked
A5S
ON/OFF ON ON ON Unblocked Unblocked
Invoice S
Ledger (11 × 17) OFF ON OFF OFF Blocked Blocked
Legal (8-1/2 × 14) OFF OFF OFF ON Unblocked Unblocked
Letter S
CONFIGURATION/
OFF ON ON OFF Unblocked Unblocked

(8-1/2 × 11 S)
OPERATION
Letter (8- /2 × 11)

1
ON ON ON ON Blocked Blocked
FLS * OFF OFF OFF OFF Unblocked Unblocked
K8 S (270 mm ×
OFF OFF ON OFF Blocked Blocked
390 mm)
K16 (270 mm ×
OFF ON ON ON Blocked Blocked
195 mm)
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.
220 x 330 mm, 8 × 13, 81/8 × 131/4, 81/4 × 13, 81/2 × 13
Switch/sensor states
Physical state
Switch/sensor HIGH signal LOW signal
Paper FD sensor board: Switches 1 to 4 OFF ON
Tray 1 paper CD size detect sensor/1, 2
Blocked Unblocked
Tray 2 paper CD size detect sensor/1, 2
126
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.3.4 Paper level detection control
• The paper level detection control is performed under any of the following conditions:
“Tray 1/tray 2 is closed in position”
“The up/down control of the paper lift-up plate is completed”
A. Paper near-empty detection

• The near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the paper feed tray.
• As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the
lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is raised.
• When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the near empty
sensor is blocked, the machine detects a near-empty condition.
• A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use
becomes about 50 ± 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
A1UDT2C991AA
[1] Near empty sensor (PS14/PS24) [2] Actuator

[3] Paper lift-up plate B (upper position) [4] Lift-up motor (M11/M21)
[5] Pick-up roller [6] Paper lift-up plate A (upper position)
127
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Paper empty detection

• The tray 1 and tray 2 use the same control system to detect a paper empty condition.
• A paper empty condition is detected by the tray detection sensor, upper limit sensor, and
paper empty sensor.
• Based on the combination of detection signals from each of the sensors, a paper empty
condition is detected.
Sensor Paper empty

Paper empty sensor Unblocked
Tray detection sensor Blocked
Upper limit sensor Unblocked
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[5]
A1UDT2C990AA

[3] Paper feed sensor (PS11/PS21) [4] Paper empty detection plate
(bizhub 423 only) (Lower position: paper empty)
[5] Paper empty sensor (PS15/PS25) [6] Upper limit sensor (PS12/PS22)
[7] Paper empty detection plate
(Upper position: paper remaining)
128
bizhub 423/363/283/223
C. Paper level display
• The amount of paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each paper feed tray
and by the screen of the control panel.
• The following shows how the paper level is displayed.
Other statuses
Paper feed tray
Empty Near empty (Including during lift-up and no paper feed tray
condition
conditions)
LED ON Blinking * OFF
* : The LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode / System 1 /
Machine State LED Setting / Paper Remainder.
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
[4]
OPERATION
[5] [6]
A1UDT2E005DA
[1] Tray 1 LED board (LEDB1) [2] Tray 2 LED board (LEDB2)
[3] Tray3 LED board (LEDB31) [3] Tray3 LED board (LEDB51)
(For option PC-109/208) (For option PC-409)
[4] Tray4 LED board (LEDB41) [5] Paper near empty display
(For option PC-208)
[6] Paper empty display
129
bizhub 423/363/283/223
15.3.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism

• The paper feed tray is provided with a locking mechanism.
A. Unlocking the paper feed tray

• Withdrawing the knob of the paper feed tray to the front will disengage the tray lock pawl
provided on the right side of the paper feed tray.
• The paper feed tray can be pulled out of the machine by continuing pulling the knob with
the tray lock pawl disengaged.
• Rollers are provided for the right and left tray rails. They reduce the operating force
required for sliding in/out the paper feed tray.
B. Locking the paper feed tray

• Pushing the knob of the paper feed tray all the way toward the rear will allow the paper
feed tray to be slid into the machine.
• When the paper feed tray is inserted all the way in place, the tray lock pawl provided on
the right side of the paper feed tray locks the tray in place.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
[4]
[4]
[4] [3]
A1UDT2C988AB
[1] Lock pawl [2] Lock lever

[3] Knob [4] Roller
130
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 16. REGISTRATION SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16. REGISTRATION SECTION
16.1 Configuration
[1] [2] [3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4] A1UDT2C022DA
[1] Image transfer roller [2] Registration sensor (PS1)

[3] Registration roller [4] Registration clutch (CL1)
16.2 Drive
[1] [2]
A1UDT2C023DA
[1] Transport motor (M1) [2] Registration clutch (CL1)
131
16. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Registration control
• The transport motor provides the drive for the registration roller.
• The registration clutch is connected to the registration roller. When the registration clutch
is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is transmitted to the registration
roller. This rotates the registration roller.
• The paper will create a loop between the tray 1 paper feed roller (or tray2 vertical trans-
port roller/manual paper feed clutch) and the registration roller when the paper is being
conveyed in order to correct the skew.
• The registration roller is controlled in order to synchronize the timing the unit starts writ-
ing the image and conveying paper.
A. Adjustment
• The amount of the loop of the paper can be adjusted in the “Service Mode / Machine /
Printer Reg. Loop Adj.”. Changing the adjustment value will change the OFF timing of the
tray 1 paper feed clutch (or tray 2 vertical transport clutch).
[1] [2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C024DA
[1] Registration sensor (PS1) [2] Actuator
132
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16.3.2 Registration roller paper dust remover mechanism
• The paper dust remover is disposed so as to be in contact with the registration roller
(driven side) in order to remove paper dust from the registration section.
• The paper dust remover is pressed up against the registration roller (driven side) at all
times and is not provided with any retraction mechanism.
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C610AA
[1] Paper dust remover [2] Registration roller
16.3.3 Paper dust remover new article detection

• No new article detection functions are provided. If the paper dust remover is replaced
with a new one, therefore, the “Paper Dust Remover Rotation Time counter” must be
reset using “Service Mode / Counter / Life”.
A. Paper dust remover rotation time
A1UDT2E065DA
133
16. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
16.3.4 Paper dust remover life detection

• The life counter of the paper dust remover controls detection of life of the paper dust
remover.

Paper dust remover rotation time M*
*: M represents a code that denotes the paper dust remover rotation time.
A. Paper dust remover rotation time counter life determination

• If the counter value of paper dust remover rotation time reaches the threshold, the
machine determines that the paper dust remover has reached a new state.
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5] [6]
A1UDT2C592AA
[1] Paper dust remover (new article) [2] Life threshold value
[3] Normal display [4] L code display (Paper dust remover rotation
time excess)
(1) Paper dust remover rotation time counter life criteria

Less than the paper dust remover
Normal Normal (print enabled)
rotation time threshold
Paper dust
remover rota-
L code display Equal to or more than the paper
tion time
(print enabled: outside image guaranteed range) dust remover rotation time threshold
excess
(Reaching life)
134
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Paper dust remover life display
• The L code screen is displayed when the value of the paper dust remover rotation time
counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed range).

L-11 Fusing unit
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E066DA
16.3.5 Life value of paper dust remover

NOTE
of Field Service.

bizhub 423/363 3,921M
bizhub 283/223 4,845M
135
17. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17. FUSING SECTION

17.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
[7] [3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C514AB
[1] Paper transport roller [2] Paper transport roll

[3] Fusing separation claw [4] Pressure roller
[5] Heating roller fusing heater lamp (FH) [6] Heating roller thermostat (TS)
[7] Heating roller thermistor (TH2) [8] Paper exit sensor (PS3)
17.2 Drive
[2]
[1]
A1UDT2C515AA
[1] Heating roller [2] Transport motor (M1)
136
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 17. FUSING SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17.3 Operation
17.3.1 Fusing roller drive control
• Drive of the fusing unit is controlled by the transport motor.
• The transport motor drives the heating roller and the pressure roller is driven by the heat-
ing roller.
17.3.2 Fusing temperature control
• The surface temperature of the heating roller is detected using thermistors and the corre-
sponding heater lamps are turned ON or OFF as necessary to maintain the set fusing
temperature.
[1] [3] [5]
[2] [4] [6] [7] [8]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[9]
0
A1UDT2C062DB
[1] Power switch ON [2] During the warm-up cycle

[3] Warm-up completed [4] In standby state
[5] Print start command [6] During a print cycle
[7] In standby state [8] Sleep mode
[9] Warm-up complete temperature
137
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A. Temperature control during warm-up

• Control is provided until the heating roller reaches the predetermined temperature.
(1) Control start timing

• The power switch is turned ON.
• The main body leaves the sleep mode.
• A door is closed.
(2) Control termination timing

• The heating roller reaches a predetermined temperature.
• A door is opened.
B. Temperature control during stand-by

• Controlled so as to make the temperature of the heating roller suitable for printing. Also
controlled so as to shorten the period of time it takes the main body to enter the print
mode.

• At the end of the warm-up control
• At the end of a print cycle
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

• At the start of a print cycle
• A malfunction occur.
C. Temperature control during printing

• The heating roller temperature is controlled according to the type of media and environ-
mental conditions in order to achieve good fusing performance.
• A print request is received.

• A malfunction or media misfeed occurs.
• At the end of a print cycle
(3) Print control temperatures
• The heating roller temperature is set according to the type of media, main body interior
temperature (as measured by the temperature/humidity sensor), and so on.
D. Temperature control during sleep mode

• The heating roller fusing heater lamp is turned OFF during the sleep mode.
138
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17.3.3 Protection from abnormal temperatures
A. Heating roller thermistor protection (software)
• The heating roller thermistors are connected via a short-circuit connector. If a connection
failure occurs in the heating roller thermistor as a result of the thermistor’s not being con-
nected via the short-circuit connector, a heater remote is cut off.
If the above condition is detected, the machine displays the malfunction code represent-
ing a warm-up failure and prohibits the initiation of a new copy cycle. (This is an ordinary
detection of a warm-up failure.)
• When the heating roller thermistor detects a predetermined temperature due to an
abnormally high temperature as a result of a faulty triac or remote driver, the main body
displays a malfunction code representing an abnormally high temperature and prohibits
the initiation of a new copy cycle. (This is an ordinary detection of a malfunction of an
abnormally high temperature.)
B. Heating roller thermistor protection (hardware)

• A different protection is provided when the CPU overruns, becoming unable to detect the
malfunction of an abnormally high temperature. If the heating roller thermistor detects a
predetermined temperature, the heater relay of the power supply unit is turned OFF
CONFIGURATION/
through the printer control board and the power supply to each of the heating roller fusing
OPERATION
heater lamps is shut down. If the detected temperature thereafter decreases, the heater
relay is turned ON again and supply of power to the heater lamps is resumed. The
sequence of these operations is repeated until the CPU recovers from the overrun and
becomes able to detect the malfunction of an abnormally high temperature. This control
allows the power supply to each of the heater lamps to be shut down before the corre-
sponding thermostat operates. It thereby suppresses damage to the Fusing Unit itself.
C. Heating roller thermostat protection

• If detection of the abnormally high temperature is not possible due to a defective heating
roller thermistor or other reason, the heating roller thermostat comes into play to shut
down the power supply to each of the heating roller fusing heater lamps. The heating
roller thermostat is rated at the predetermined temperature. (Ordinary protection against
abnormally high temperatures)
17.3.4 Paper feed wait control

• If Thick 1/2, User Paper Settings (Thick 1/2), postcards, envelopes, or letterhead is
selected, the transport motor is deenergized at the start of the print cycle regardless of
the paper size, thereby delaying the paper feed sequence three sec.
• The paper feed wait control is performed only for the first sheet of paper.
139
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17.3.5 Paper-to-paper distance control

• Degraded fusing performance results due to a reduced temperature at the fusing section,
if a continuous print cycle is run to produce printed pages on thick paper. To prevent this,
a predetermined paper-to-paper distance is provided, thereby preventing the tempera-
ture of the fusing section from decreasing and maintaining an intended level of fusing
performance.
• The paper-to-paper distance control is performed for the second and subsequent sheets
of paper.
• The control is applicable to Thick 1/2, User Paper Settings (Thick 1/2), envelopes, post-
cards, and letterhead.
• The control is enabled or disabled by so setting in [Fusing Productivity Choice] available
from the Service Mode.
17.3.6 Curl prevention control

• Paper after the fusing process can be prevented from curling by delaying the paper feed
sequence according to the type of the paper selected.
• Timing at which to execute the control can be changed using [Print Interval Extension] of
the Service Mode.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
17.3.7 Fusing unit new article detection

• No new article detection functions are provided. If the fusing unit is replaced with a new
one, therefore, the “Fusing Unit Rotation Time counter” must be reset using “Service
A. Fusing unit rotation time
A1UDT2E052DA
140
bizhub 423/363/283/223
17.3.8 Fusing unit life detection
• The life counter of the fusing unit controls detection of life of the fusing unit.

Fusing unit rotation time *
M
*: M represents a code that denotes the fusing unit rotation time.
A. Fusing unit rotation time counter life determination

• If the counter value of fusing unit rotation time reaches the threshold, the machine deter-
mines that the fusing unit has reached a new state.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[8] [9]
A1UDT2C569AA
[1] Fusing unit (new article) [2] Life threshold value

Fusing unit rotation time excess)
141
bizhub 423/363/283/223
(1) Fusing unit rotation time counter life criteria

Normal Less than the fusing unit rotation
Normal
(print enabled: within image guaranteed range) time threshold
Fusing unit
Equal to or more than the fusing unit
rotation time L code display
rotation time threshold and less than
excess (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range)
the replacement alarm threshold
(Reaching life)
Replacement Replacement alarm display rotation time replacement alarm
alarm (print enabled: outside image guaranteed range) threshold and less than the life stop
threshold
rotation time life stop threshold
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2E036DA
142
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Fusing unit life display
• The life reaching screen is displayed when the value of the fusing unit rotation time
counter reaches the life threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed range).
• The L code screen is displayed when the value of the fusing unit rotation time counter
reaches the fusing unit rotation time threshold (print enabled, outside image guaranteed
range).

L-11 Fusing unit
• The life stop screen is displayed when the value of the fusing unit rotation time counter
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1UDT2E053DA
A1UDT2E054DA
143
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A1UDT2E075DA
17.3.9 Life value of fusing unit

NOTE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
of Field Service.
bizhub 423 14,800 M 15,800 M 16,440 M
bizhub 363 16,130 M 17,200 M 17,920 M
bizhub 283/223 19,930 M 21,350 M 22,300 M
144
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 18. PAPER EXIT/SWITCHBACK SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
18. PAPER EXIT/SWITCHBACK SECTION
18.1 Configuration/Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C512AA
[1] Switchback motor (M91) [2] Paper exit/switchback roller

[3] Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3) [4] Paper exit/switchback roll
145
18. PAPER EXIT/SWITCHBACK SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
18.2 Operation
18.2.1 Transport control
A. Paper transport path
• The paper exit/switchback roller is driven by the switchback motor.
• The duplex transport roller 1 is driven by the duplex transport motor.
• In 1-sided printing, the paper exit/switchback roller rotates forward and the paper trans-
ported from the fusing section is ejected onto the paper exit tray. In the second print cycle
in 2-sided mode, the paper is ejected in the same manner.
B. Duplex transport
• In the first print cycle in 2-sided mode, the paper transported from the fusing section is
transported to the paper exit direction. When the paper reaches a predetermined posi-
tion, the paper exit/switchback roller rotates backward to convey the paper to the duplex
transport roller 1. For details, see “DUPLEX SECTION”.
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
[1] [3]
OPERATION
[5]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[6]
A1UDT2C556AA
[1] Paper exit/switchback roller [2] Switchback motor (M91)

[3] Duplex transport roller 1 [4] Duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92)
[5] 2-sided mode paper path [6] 1-sided mode paper path
146
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 19. DUPLEX SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19. DUPLEX SECTION
19.1 Configuration/Drive
[1]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
A1UDT2C508AA
[1] Duplex unit door sensor (PS91) [2] Duplex transport roller 1
[3] Duplex transport roller 2 [4] Duplex transport roller 3
[5] Duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93) [6] Duplex transport motor (M92)
[7] Duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92)
147
19. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19.2 Operation
19.2.1 Paper transport control
• Paper transported from the paper exit/switchback section is transported to the internal
duplex section by the duplex transport roller 1.
• Paper is transported to the registration section by the duplex transport roller 2 and 3 to
re-transport the paper.
[1] [2] [3]
[17]
[4]
[16]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[15]
[5]
[14]
[13]
[6]
[12]
[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] A1UDT2C557AA
[1] 2-sided mode paper path [2] Paper exit/switchback roller

[3] Duplex transport roller 1 [4] Duplex unit upper transport sensor (PS92)
[5] Duplex transport roller 2 [6] Duplex unit lower transport sensor (PS93)
[7] Duplex transport roller 3 [8] Tray 1 separation roller
[9] Tray 1 paper feed roller [10] Tray 1 pick-up roller
[11] 1-sided mode paper path [12] Registration sensor (PS1)
[13] Registration roller [14] Photo conductor
[15] Image transfer roller [16] Fusing roller (Heating roller/Pressure roller)
[17] Paper exit sensor (PS3)
148
bizhub 423/363/283/223
A. Transport roller control
• The duplex transport roller 1, duplex transport roller 2 and duplex transport roller 3 are
connected to duplex transport motor. When the duplex transport motor is energized,
these rollers start rotating to transport paper.
B. Paper entrance control

• The paper transported from the fusing section is temporarily fed in the paper exit direc-
tion. When the paper reaches a predetermined position, the switchback motor of the exit
section is rotated backward. Then, the paper exit/switchback roller is rotated backward,
so that the paper is fed to the duplex transport roller 1.
• When the paper reaches a predetermined position, the duplex transport motor of the
duplex section is energized. The duplex transport roller 1 is then rotated to transport the
paper fed from the paper exit section to the duplex transport roller 2.
• The duplex unit upper transport sensor located downstream of the duplex transport roller
2 along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from the duplex
transport roller 1.
• The paper is transported from the duplex transport roller 2 to the duplex transport roller
3.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
C. Duplex paper feed control
• The duplex unit lower transport sensor located upstream of the duplex transport roller 3
along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from the duplex
transport roller 2.
• When the leading edge of the paper moves past the duplex unit lower transport sensor
and reaches the specified position, the duplex transport motor is deenergized to stop the
transport of the paper temporarily (re-feeding position).
• At predetermined paper feed timing, the duplex transport motor is energized to resume
the transport of the paper.
• The paper is fed from the duplex transport roller 3 onto the registration roller at the verti-
cal transport part.
149
bizhub 423/363/283/223
19.2.2 Duplex circulation control

• The duplex circulation control is performed differently according to the length of the
paper.
Paper length
Duplex circulation control
Lower limit Upper limit
Letter (215.9 mm) Ledger (431.8 mm) One-sheet circulation operation
B5 (182 mm) Letter (215.9 mm) Two-sheet circulation operation
A. One-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
• The first sheet of paper is taken up
and fed in from the main body drawer
and the main body starts the first print
cycle to produce the print image of the
second page of the original [2].
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
A1UDT2C543AA
Operation 2
• The 1-sided print is transported to the
[2]
paper exit/switchback section.
• When the paper reaches a predeter-
mined position, the direction of rota-
tion of the paper exit/switchback roller
is changed and the 1-sided print is
transported toward and into the duplex
unit.
A1UDT2C545AA
Operation 3
• The 1-sided print, which is being fed
through the duplex section, is tempo-
rarily stopped at the re-transport posi-
tion and then re-transported.
[2]
A1UDT2C546AB
150
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Operation 4
• The main body carries out the second
print cycle to produce the print image
of the first page of the original [1] on
the other side of the 1-sided print.
[1] [2]
A1UDT2C547AA
Operation 5
• The first 2-sided print is fed out to the
[2] exit section of the main body.
• At the same time that the first 2-sided
[1]
print is fed out of the main body, the
CONFIGURATION/
image of the fourth page of the original
OPERATION
[4] is printed on the second sheet of
paper.
[4]
A1UDT2C548AA
• Steps 2 through 5 are repeated.
151
bizhub 423/363/283/223
B. Two-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
• The first sheet of paper is taken up
and fed in from the main body drawer
and the main body starts the first print
cycle to produce the print image of the
second page of the original [2].
[2]
A1UDT2C543AA
Operation 2
• The 1-sided print is transported to the
[2] paper exit/switchback section.
CONFIGURATION/
mined position, the direction of rota-

OPERATION

is changed and the 1-sided print is
transported toward and into the duplex
unit.
• At the same time that the 1-sided print
is transported, the second sheet of
A1UDT2C549AA
paper is taken up and fed into the
main body.
Operation 3
• The print image of the fourth page of
the original is produced on the second
sheet of paper [4] and the paper is
[4] transported to the paper exit/switch-
[2]
back section.
• At the same time, the first 1-sided print
is transported through the duplex sec-
tion.
A1UDT2C550AA
152
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Operation 4
• The main body produces the print
image of the first page of the original
[1] on the first 1-sided print.
• At the same time that the image of the
[1] [2]
first page of the original is printed, the
[4]
third sheet of paper is taken up and
fed into the main body.
• The second 1-sided print is trans-
ported through the duplex section.
A1UDT2C551AA
Operation 5
• While feeding the first 2-sided print
[2]
out, main body produces the print
[1] image of the 6th page of the original
[6] on the third sheet of paper.
CONFIGURATION/
• The second 1-sided print is stopped
OPERATION
immediately after the duplex transport
roller 3 and waits until the third sheet
[4] of paper undergoes the print process
[6]
for printing the print image of the 6th
page of the original.
A1UDT2C552AB
Operation 6
• The third 1-sided print is transported
[2] [6] to the paper exit/switchback section.
[1] mined position, the direction of rota-
is changed and the third 1-sided print
is transported toward and into the
[4]
duplex unit.
• At the same time, a sequence is
started to re-feed the second 1-sided
A1UDT2C553AA
print that has been in the standby
state in the duplex unit.
153
bizhub 423/363/283/223
Operation 7
• The main body carries out the first
print cycle for the second sheet of
[2] paper to produce the print image of
[3] [4] the third page of the original [3].
[1]
[6]
• At the same time, the third 1-sided
print is transported through the duplex
section.
• At the same time, the forth sheet of
paper is taken up and fed into the
main body.
A1UDT2C554AA
Operation 8
• While feeding the second 2-sided print
out, main body produces the print
image of the 8th page of the original
[4]
[8] on the fourth sheet of paper.
CONFIGURATION/
[3] • The third 1-sided print is stopped

[2]
OPERATION
immediately after the duplex transport

[1] roller 3 and waits until the fourth sheet
[8] [6] of paper undergoes the print process
for printing the print image of the 8th
page of the original.
A1UDT2C555AB
• Steps 6 through 8 are repeated.
154
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 20. IMAGE PROCESSING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
20. IMAGE PROCESSING
20.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram
1. Photoelectric conversion
CCD sensor board
2. Analog-to-digital conversion
To the MFP board
• The following detail the image processing operations performed by the scanner section.
1. A reduction type CCD sensor is used to read the light reflected off the original and
convert the optical data to a corresponding electric signal. To make data process-
ing faster, data transfer and output are done through two channels, one for even-
numbered pixels and the other for odd-numbered pixels.
CONFIGURATION/
2. The odd and even analog signals output from the CCD sensor chips are synthe-
OPERATION
sized to form a single string of signal data which is in turn converted to 10-bit digital
signals (1024 gradation levels).
• The image data is transmitted to MFP board on the write section through the interface
cable.
155
20. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
20.2 Write section image processing block diagram
From scanner section
1. Shading correction MFP board
2. Line-to-line variation 16. Frame memory

correction/color
aberration correction
17. Output buffer memory
3. Detection of security pattern
18. BTC expansion
4. Free erase
19. Resolution conversion
processing in the main
5. ACS control scanning direction/move
ment processing
CONFIGURATION/
6. AE processing
OPERATION
20. Resolution conversion

processing in the sub
7. Image data editing scanning direction
8. Image area discrimination 21. Color conversion

processing
V to K
Monochrome data creation Mode other than
photo
22. Embedment of security
pattern
9. Miscellaneous processing
(improved reproduction of
black text, edge emphasis, 23. Area discrimination FEET
smoothing and color balance)
24. Interpolation
10. BTC compression
Gamma correction 25. Gamma correction

11. Input buffer memory
12. JBIG compression 26. Error diffusion

(binary)
13. File (code) memory 27. Screening

DRAM:2GB (standard)
HDD:250GB (standard)
28. Speed conversion
Modulation
14. JBIG expansion
15. Memory access coordinator
To PH unit
156
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 20. IMAGE PROCESSING
bizhub 423/363/283/223
• The following detail the image processing operations performed by MFP board on the
Write section.
1. Correct variations in reading caused by pixel-to-pixel variations in sensitivity of the
CCD sensor and uneven light distribution by the exposure lamp. A peak-hold-type
shading correction is performed, in which the maximum value of two or more read-
ings of two or more lines is taken to prevent effect due to dust or dirt on the shading
sheet.
2. To correct differences in the position of each chip of CCD sensors R, G, and B,
FIFO memory is adopted to match the output timing. Also correct color aberration
of the lens.
3. The security pattern created during printing on this machine is detected and copy-
ing is enabled or disabled through a password (when the security kit SC-507 is
mounted).
4. If outer document elimination is selected from the control panel, document area
determination processing is performed for each line within the document area data
acquired during prescan. Then, the START and END positions of the document
area in the main scanning direction are detected and the area outside the START
and END positions is erased as the outside-the-document area.
CONFIGURATION/
5. The scanning area is divided into multiple blocks. The ratio of color or monochrome
OPERATION
is calculated for each of these blocks. The machine then determines whether the
entire original is colored or monochrome.
6. A histogram of lightness for AE processing is generated. The AE level of the docu-
ment is determined based on this histogram and AE processing is performed.
7. R, G, and B data are then converted to value and color component data for adjust-
ments of saturation, lightness, and hue.
8. Each image area, whether it is a color edge area, black edge area, dot area, or a
continuous gradation area, is discriminated.
9. Other types of processing performed are the improved reproduction of black text,
edge emphasis, smoothing and color balance.
10. Each Image data of R, G, and B is compressed to reduce the consumption of data
capacity.
11. Temporarily storeds The BTC-compressed image data.
12. The stored image data is compressed in the JBIG (Joint Bi-level image Experts
Group) format.
13. Each Image data of R, G, and B in the copy, print, scan, and fax mode is stored. In
PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K is stored.
14. The image data read from the file memory is uncompressed through a method in a
reverse way of JBIG compression. At this time, image rotating or sorting processing
is conducted.
15. JBIG image data are expanded in the frame memory.
16. Each Image data of R, G, and B is stored in the frame memory.
17. Temporarily stores the image data output from the frame memory.
18. The image data is expanded through a method opposite to that used in the BTC
compression.
19. FIFO memory is used to enlarge or reduce images in the main scanning direction.
The image is enlarged by increasing the number of data readings and reduced by
decreasing the number of data readings.
20. Reduction processing is conducted in sub scanning direction. No processing is
done at same size or zoom, but at reduction, the lines are thinned out.
157
20. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21. When copying in a photo mode or making PC print, the V data is converted to the K
density data. Also, the masking processing, which compensates for the deviation in
the spectral reflection characteristics of the toner, and UCR/BP processing are per-
formed on the image data.
For PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K are stored and there is no need
of converting or processing those data.
22. The security pattern is embedded in the image data. Either enabling copying
through a password or unconditionally prohibiting copying can be selected from the
control panel for the security pattern to be embedded (when the security kit SC-507
is mounted).
23. Edge of letter and lineal drawing gets area discrimination and FEET processing is
conducted according to the discrimination result.
24. When FEET processing is conducted, interpolation is done so that no influence is
given to continuous gradation portion.
25. Makes the necessary corrections so that the printed gradations have linear charac-
teristics, since the image density of the input image data is not directly proportional
to that of the printed image because of the changing developing and photo conduc-
tor characteristics.
CONFIGURATION/
26. In photo mode during copying and PC print, the image is processed as multi-valued
OPERATION
data (8-bit data). In any mode other than photo, the error diffusion method is
employed to process the image as binary (1-bit) data.
27. Creates the density distribution of a predetermined pattern to enable outstanding
gradation reproduction.
28. Adjust the processing speed in the board (main scanning) to conform to the input
processing speed. The laser is emitted according to the laser intensity information.
158
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 21. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
21.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON
21.1.1 Configuration
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C025DA
21.1.2 Operation
• When the main power switch is turned ON, power is supplied from the DC power supply
unit to the following components.
Voltage Power supplied to

24V Printer control board, Scanner relay board
12V Printer control board, MFP board, Control panel, Scanner relay board, CCD board
Printer control board, MFP board, Control panel, Scanner relay board, CCD board,
5.1V
USB board
3.3V Printer control board
159
21. POWER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON

A1UDT2C073DA
21.2.2 Operation
CONFIGURATION/
• When the sub power switch is turned ON, MFP board detects it and sends a control sig-
OPERATION
nal to the DC power supply through the printer control board.

• The DC power supply then supplies 3.3V DC, 5.1V DC, 12V DC, and 24V DC to all
PWBs and options. It also turns ON the relays in the PWBs and power can be supplied to
the heater lamp.
160
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 21. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
21.3 Power cables
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
A1UDT2E018DB
[1] Power code
21.3.2 Operation
• The main body uses a single outlet.
Power supply: 100V 15A, 110V 15A, 120V 12A, 127V 12A, 230V 8A
161
22. FAN CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
22. FAN CONTROL

22.1 Configuration
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[5] [4]
A1UDT2C030DB
[1] Fusing unit cooling fan motor (FM3) [2] Cooling fan motor (FM2)
[3] Power supply cooling fan motor (FM1) [4] Toner suction fan motor (FM4)
[5] MFP board cooling fan motor (FM5)
162
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 22. FAN CONTROL
bizhub 423/363/283/223
22.2 Operation
22.2.1 Function
Motor name Function (purpose)

Power supply cooling fan • Draws outside air into the inside of the machine to prevent the tempera-
motor (FM1) ture of the DC power supply, PH section, and other parts from rising.
• A white belt may occur on the image because of the lower sensitivity of
the photo conductor due to ozone accumulated around the photo con-
ductor charge corona. In order to avoid this trouble, ozone filter removes
the ozone inside the photo conductor charge corona to keep the sensitiv-
Cooling fan motor (FM2) ity of the photo conductor.
• Ozone accumulated the around photo conductor charge corona will be
absorbed by ozone filter and be removed.
• Discharges heat out of the main body to prevent the temperature of the
toner bottle from rising.
• Heat from the power supply unit is discharged out of the main body by
Fusing unit cooling fan
the fusing unit cooling fan motor to thereby prevent the temperature at
motor (FM3)
the power supply unit from rising.
CONFIGURATION/
Toner suction fan motor • Toner particles airborne in the imaging unit are drawn in adsorbed by the
OPERATION
(FM4) toner filter.
MFP board cooling fan • Blows outside air against the MFP board to prevent the temperature of
motor (FM5) the board from rising.
163
22. FAN CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
22.2.2 Control condition
Motor name Control Control conditions

Power supply cooling ON • The transport motor remains energized
fan motor (FM1) OFF • The transport motor remains deenergized
• During a predetermined period of time after the
ON (high speed) completion of a warm-up cycle
• When printing
• An open door is detected during a print cycle
• In a state not corresponding to ON (high speed) or
ON (medium speed)
Cooling fan motor (FM2) OFF conditions
• A fusing-related malfunction occurs
ON (low speed) -
• During a warm-up cycle
OFF • A malfunction not associated with fusing occurs
• when the door is open
• During a predetermined period of time after the
Fusing unit cooling fan ON completion of a warm-up cycle
CONFIGURATION/
motor (FM3) • When printing

OPERATION
OFF • In a state not corresponding to ON conditions

Toner suction fan motor ON • The PC motor remains energized
(FM4) OFF • The PC motor remains deenergized
• During predrive after the main power has been
ON (high speed) turned ON
• When printing
MFP board cooling fan ON (medium speed) -
motor (FM5)
• Remains energized at all times after the completion
ON (low speed)
of the predrive after the power has been turned ON
OFF • In main power OFF state
164
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 23. COUNTER INFORMATION
bizhub 423/363/283/223
23. COUNTER INFORMATION
23.1 Configuration
[2] [3] [5]
[1] [4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1UDT2C069DB
[1] Printer control board (PRCB) [2] Electronic counter

[3] Total counter [4] MFP board (MFPB)
[5] Key counter (option)
Name Function
• Shows the cumulative number of copies made in all copy modes
Total counter • A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
• Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
• Shows the cumulative number of copies made or printed pages
Electronic counter produced in each of different copy or print modes
• Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
• The counter that disables copying when counting the predeter-
mined number of copies
• A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
• Counts one when a paper take-up start signal or image forming
start signal, whichever occurs earlier, is applied to it
• The count timing can be selected using “BILLING SETTING / Man-
Key counter (option)
agement Function Choice / Key Counter Only” of the service mode.
If “Paper feed” is selected, the count is incremented when the paper
is fed in (default setting).
If “Paper out” is selected, the count is incremented when the paper
is fed out of the main body. For details, see “BILLING SETTING/
Management Function Choice” of Field Service.
165
23. COUNTER INFORMATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
bizhub 423/363/283/223
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
166
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
DF-621
DF-621
OUTLINE
2. PAPRE FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4
2.1 In 1-sided mode .................................................................................................... 4
OUTLINE
2.2 In 2-sided mode .................................................................................................... 5
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 7
3.1 Section configuration ............................................................................................ 7
CONFIGURATION/
3.2 Electrical parts configuration ................................................................................ 8
OPERATION
4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Paper feed drive.................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Transport/paper exit drive ................................................................................... 10
4.3 Original glass cleaning drive............................................................................... 11
5. OPERATION ......................................................................................................... 12
5.1 Document set section ......................................................................................... 12
5.1.1 Original size detection mechanism ............................................................. 12
5.1.2 Original set detection control ...................................................................... 19
5.2 Document feed section ....................................................................................... 20
5.2.1 Pick-up roller up/down control..................................................................... 20
5.2.2 Document feed/separation control .............................................................. 21
5.3 Document registration section ............................................................................ 23
5.3.1 Document registration loop formation process............................................ 23
5.3.2 Adjustment of document registration loop amount...................................... 23
5.4 Document reading section .................................................................................. 24
5.4.1 Document reading roller pressure/release control ...................................... 25
5.4.2 DF original glass contamination prevention control .................................... 26
5.5 Document exit section ........................................................................................ 28
5.5.1 Document switchback/second feed control (in the 2-sided mode only) ...... 30
5.5.2 Document 2nd side registration control (in the 2-sided mode only) ............ 31
5.5.3 Document exit roller pressure/release control (in the 2-sided mode only) .. 31
5.5.4 Faxed document stamp function ................................................................. 33
5.6 Original feed operation ....................................................................................... 35
i
5.7 Raised/lowered position detection mechanism .................................................. 39

5.7.1 Document exchange detection control........................................................ 39
DF-621
5.7.2 DF raised/lowered position detection mechanism ...................................... 39

5.8 Cooling inside the unit ........................................................................................ 40
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
ii
OUTLINE
DF-621
A. Type
Name Reverse automatic document feeder

Feeding order Forward
Feed section Paper feed from top of stack
Type
Switchback section Switch back system
Exit section Straight exit system
OUTLINE
Installation Screw cramp to the main body
Document alignment Center
Document loading Left image side up
B. Functions
Modes 1-sided mode / 2-sided mode
C. Paper type
1-sided mode
Standard mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb)
(Plain paper) 2-sided mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Mixed original detection
1-sided / 2-sided mode
Type of document mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
(Plain paper)
1-sided mode
FAX mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb)
(Plain paper) 2-sided mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Metric area A6S to A3
Standard mode
Inch area 5.5 x 8.5 to 11 x 17
Mixed original detection For the mixed original detection mode, refer to the
mode mixed original feed chart.
Standard size: A5 to A3
Width: 100 to 297 mm
Length (1-sided mode):
Detectable document Metric area
139.7 to 1,000 mm
size Length (2-sided mode):
139.7 to 431.8 mm
FAX mode
Standard size: 5.5 x 8.5 to 11 x 17
Width: 3.95 to 11.69 inch
Inch area
5.5 to 39.37 inch
5.5 to 17 inch
Capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 (21.25 lb))
1
D. Paper feed prohibited originals

• If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
DF-621
Type of original Possible trouble

Feed failure, damaged sheet, or drive failure due to
Original that is stapled or clipped.
clip clogging
Book original Feed failure, damaged sheet, or drive failure
2
Original weighing less than 35g/m or more
Feed failure
than128g/m2
Torn original Feed failure, damaged sheet
OUTLINE
Highly curled original (15 mm or more) Original misfeed due to dog-ear or skew
OHP transparencies Feed failure
Label sheet Feed failure
Offset master Feed failure
Glossy photographic paper or glossy enamel
Feed failure
paper
Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet
Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet
E. Paper feed not guaranteed originals

• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of original Possible trouble

Sheets lightly curled
Dog-eared, exit failure
(Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm)
Heat sensitive paper Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
Coated paper (Ink jet paper) Take-up failure, transport failure
Translucent paper Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper immediately after paper exit from the
Take-up failure, transport failure
main unit
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose
Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
leaf) limited to vertical feeding*
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes* Transport failure
Sheets folded (e.g., sheets two-folded or Z- Take-up failure, transport failure, image deformation,
folded) multi-page feed
*: Before using loose leaf or folded original, straighten the perforations or fold first.
The permissible lift amount is 15 mm or less.
2
F. Mixed original feed chart

For metric
DF-621
Max. original 182 148 128
297 mm 257 mm 210 mm
size mm mm mm
Mixed original size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S A6S
A3 OK OK - - - - - - -
297 mm
A4 OK OK - - - - - - -
B4 OK OK OK OK - - - - -
257 mm
B5 OK OK OK OK - - - - -
OUTLINE
A4S OK OK OK OK OK OK - - -
210 mm
A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK - - -
182 mm B5S NG NG OK OK OK OK OK - -
148 mm A5S NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK -
128 mm B6S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK
For inch
Max. original size 11 8.5 5.5

Mixed original size 11 x 17 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11S 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 5.5S
11 x 17 OK OK - - - -
11
8.5 x 11 OK OK - - - -
8.5 x 14 OK OK OK OK OK -
8.5
8.5 x 11S OK OK OK OK OK -
8.5 x 5.5 NG NG OK OK OK -
5.5
8.5 x 5.5S NG NG NG NG NG OK
Mixed original feed available

OK
(Tilted with in 1.5 % or less)
NG NO. mixed original feed
- Can not set original
G. Machine specifications
DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)

Power requirements
DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
60 W or less
consumption
596 mm (W) x 542 mm (D) x 116 mm (H) * excluding the protruding part
Dimensions
23.46 inch (W) x 21.34 inch (D) x 4.57 inch (H)
Weight 11.5 kg (25.35 lb) or less
H. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE
3
2. PAPRE FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
2. PAPRE FEED PATH

2.1 In 1-sided mode
DF-621
[5] [4] [3] [2]

[6]
[8] [7]
[9] [1]
OUTLINE
[10]
[11] [16] [17]

[12] [13] [14] [15] A143T1C500AA
[1] Document feed path [2] Document set sensor (PS1)

[3] Document pick-up roller [4] Document separation roller
[5] Separation roller sensor (PS2) [6] Document registration path
[7] Document registration sensor (PS3) [8] Document registration roller
[9] Document transport path [10] Document reading roller/1
[11] Reading roller sensor (PS4) [12] Document reading path
[13] Original glass cleaning roller [14] Document exit sensor (PS5)
[15] Document reading roller/2 [16] Document exit roller
[17] Document exit path
4
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 2. PAPRE FEED PATH
2.2 In 2-sided mode
DF-621
[3/7] [2]
[1]
OUTLINE
[5/9]
[4/8] [6]
A143T1C501AA
[1] Document feed path [2] Document registration path

[3] Document transport path (1st side) [4] Document reading path (1st side)
[5] Document switchback path (switchback) [6] Document second feed path (2nd side)
[7] Document transport path (2nd side) [8] Document reading path (2nd side)
[9] Document exit path
5
DF-621
OUTLINE
Blank Page
6
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
3. CONFIGURATION
DF-621
3.1 Section configuration
[4] [3] [2] [1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5] [7] [6] [8]
A143T1C502AA
[1] Document set section [2] Document feed section

[3] Document registration section [4] Document transport section
[5] Document reading section [6] Document exit /switchback section
[7] Document second feed section [8] Document exit tray section
7
3. CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
3.2 Electrical parts configuration

DF-621
[1] [25]
[2]
[3] [24]
[4] [23]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[22]
[8]
[21]
[9]
CONFIGURATION/
[10]
[11]
OPERATION
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16] [20]
[19]
[17]
[18]
A143T2C500AA
[1] Document set sensor (PS1) [2] DF control board (DFCB)

[3] DF cooling fan motor (FM1) [4] Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1)
[5] Document feed motor (M2) [6] Document feed clutch (CL1)
[7] Document registration clutch (CL2) [8] Reading roller release motor (M3)
[9] Reading roller release position sensor [10] Document reading motor (M1)
(PS12)
[11] Upper door sensor (PS14) [12] Separation roller sensor (PS2)
[13] Document registration sensor (PS3) [14] Document exit sensor (PS5)
[15] Reading roller sensor (PS4) [16] Mixed original sensor/1 (PS9)
[17] Mixed original sensor/2 (PS10) [18] Mixed original sensor/3 (PS11)
[19] Glass cleaning roller (M4) [20] Glass cleaning roller home sensor (PS13)
[21] Stamp solenoid (option) (SD2) [22] Document CD size sensor (VR1)
[23] Document FD size sensor/3 (PS8) [24] Document FD size sensor/2 (PS7)
[25] Document FD size sensor/1 (PS6)
8
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 4. DRIVE
4. DRIVE
4.1 Paper feed drive
DF-621
[3] [2]
[1]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
[5]
[8]
OPERATION
[7]
[6]
A143T2C501AA
[1] Document pick-up roller [2] Document feed motor (M2)

[3] Document feed clutch (CL1) [4] Document registration clutch (CL2)
[5] Document registration roll [6] Document registration roller
[7] Document separation roller [8] Document feed roller
• The document feed motor drives the document feed section.

• The drive section of the document feed roller has the document feed clutch that controls
rotation of the document feed roller section (document pick-up roller/document feed
roller/document separation roller)
• The drive section of the document registration roller has the document registration clutch
that controls rotation of the document registration roller.
9
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
4.2 Transport/paper exit drive

DF-621
[3] [2] [1]

[4]
[5]
[10]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[6]
[7] [8] [9]
A143T2C502AA
[1] Document exit roller [2] Document exit roll

[3] Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1) [4] Document reading motor (M1)
[5] Reading roller release motor (M3) [6] Document reading roll
[7] Document reading roller/1 [8] Original glass cleaning roller
[9] Document reading roller/2 [10] Glass cleaning motor (M4)
• The document reading motor drives the document reading section and document exit
section.
• The document reading motor rotates backward to allow the second feed of the document
to be performed during switchback in the 2-sided mode.
• The document reading roll is equipped with a pressure/release mechanism. The pres-
sure is released when the trailing edge of the original moves past the roller.
• The document exit roll is equipped with a pressure/release mechanism. The pressure is
released when the original is fed in a second time so that its second side can be read.
10
4.3 Original glass cleaning drive
DF-621
[2] [1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A143T2C503AA
[1] Glass cleaning motor (M4) [2] Original glass cleaning roller
• The glass cleaning motor drives the original glass cleaning roller.
11
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
5. OPERATION
5.1 Document set section
DF-621
5.1.1 Original size detection mechanism
[2]
[1]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[9] [5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
A143T2C504AA
[1] Document FD size sensor/1 (PS6) [2] Document FD size sensor/3 (PS8)
[3] Document feed tray [4] Document FD size sensor/2 (PS7)
[5] Document CD size sensor (VR1) [6] Mixed original sensor/3 (PS11)
[7] Mixed original sensor/2 (PS10) [8] Mixed original sensor/1 (PS9)
[9] Reading roller sensor (PS4)
12
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 5. OPERATION
A. Detecting the width of the original 1

• The width of the original will be detected by the document CD size sensor under the doc-
ument feed tray.
DF-621
• When the document guide plates are moved in or out crosswise to fit the size of the orig-
inal, the size detection gear is rotated, so that the detection portion of the document CD
size sensor mounted on the same shaft as the gear is rotated. The width of the original is
calculated based on the value detected as a result of the rotation of the gear.
• The document is to be loaded in the document feed tray by aligning it with reference to
the center of the document feed tray in the standard mode. In the mixed original mode,
however, the document is aligned with reference to the rear side of the document guide
plates.
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[2] [3] [5] [6]

A143T2C514AA
[1] Adjust the document guide plates [2] Document guide plates
(center alignment)
[3] Original (standard mode) [4] Align the original with narrow width with the
rear side of the document guide plates
(rear alignment)
[5] Original with narrow width [6] Original with wide width
(mixed original mode) (mixed original mode)
B. Detecting the width of the original 2

• The width of the original in the mixed original/AMS mode will be detected by the mixed
original size sensor/1, 2 and 3 located before the document registration roller.
C. Detecting the length of the original 1

• The length of the original will be detected by the document FD size sensor/1, 2, and 3.
D. Detecting the length of the original 2

• The length of the original in the mixed original/AMS mode will be detected by the reading
roller sensor (reflector type). The length of the original is calculated based on the period
of time during which the sensor remains activated.
13
E. Original size detection

• The original size is determined by the combination of the results of detection made of the
width and length of the original.
DF-621
(1) Standard mode

Metric area
Document FD size sensor Document CD size sensor

Original size detected
1 2 3 Unit: mm
A3 ON ON ON Over 286.2 and up to 307
A4S ON ON OFF Over 190.6 and up to 236.5
A4 OFF OFF OFF Over 286.2 and up to 307
A5S OFF OFF OFF Over 136 and up to 163
A5 OFF OFF OFF Over 190.6 and up to 236.5
A6S OFF OFF OFF 114.5 or under
B4 ON ON ON Over 236.5 and up to 266.2
B5S ON OFF ON Over 163 and up to 190.6
CONFIGURATION/
B5 OFF OFF OFF Over 236.5 and up to 266.2

OPERATION
B6S OFF OFF OFF Over 114.5 and up to 136

Ledger (11 x 17) ON ON ON Over 266.2 and up to 286.2
Legal (8.5 x 14) ON ON ON Over 190.6 and up to 236.5
Letter S (8.5 x 11) ON OFF OFF Over 190.6 and up to 236.5
Letter (8.5 x 11) OFF OFF OFF Over 266.2 and up to 286.2
Foolscap (8 x 13) ON ON ON
Foolscap (8.25 x 13) ON ON ON
Over 190.6 and up to 236.5
Foolscap (8.125 x 13.25) ON ON ON
Foolscap (8.5 x 13.5) ON ON ON
14
Inch area
DF-621
1 2 3 Unit: mm
A4S ON ON OFF Over 194 and up to 236.5
B4 ON ON ON Over 236.5 and up to 266.2
B5S ON OFF ON Over 158.7 and up to 194
B5 OFF OFF OFF Over 236.5 and up to 266.2
Ledger (11 x 17) ON ON ON Over 266.2 and up to 286.2
Legal (8.5 x 14) ON ON ON Over 194 and up to 236.5
Letter S (8.5 x 11) ON OFF OFF Over 194 and up to 236.5
Letter (8.5 x 11) OFF OFF OFF Over 266.2 and up to 286.2
Invoice S (8.5 x 5.5) OFF OFF OFF 158.7 or under
Invoice (8.5 x 5.5) OFF OFF OFF Over 194 and up to 236.5
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
China area

1 2 3 Unit: mm
A4S ON ON OFF Over 169.5 and up to 243
A5S OFF OFF OFF Over 136 and up to 169.5
A6S OFF OFF OFF 114.5 or under
8K (270 mm x 390 mm) ON ON ON Over 243 and up to 281.5
16K (195 mm x 270 mm) OFF OFF OFF Over 243 and up to 281.5
16K S
ON OFF OFF Over 169.5 and up to 243
(195 mm x 270 mm)
15
(2) Mixed original mode

Metric area
DF-621
Document CD size Reading roller sensor

Document FD size sensor
Original size detected sensor (Paper length)
Unit: mm Unit: mm 1 2 3
A3 ON ON ON
B4 Over 214 ON ON OFF
A4S OFF OFF OFF
Over 286.2 Over 186 and up to

A4 ON ON ON
214
Over 152 and up to
B5 ON ON OFF
186
A5 152 or under OFF OFF OFF
Ledger (11 x 17) ON ON ON
Over 266.2 and up to Over 220
Letter S (8.5 x 11) OFF OFF OFF
286.2
Letter (8.5 x 11) 220 or under ON ON ON
CONFIGURATION/
B4 ON ON ON
OPERATION
A4S Over 186 ON OFF OFF

B5S Over 236.5 and up to OFF OFF OFF
266.2 Over 152 and up to
B5 ON ON ON
186
A5 152 or under OFF OFF ON
A4S ON ON OFF
Over 152 and up to
B5S Over 190.6 and up to ON OFF OFF
430
A5S 236.5 OFF OFF ON
A5 152 or under ON ON OFF
B5S Over 163 and up to - ON OFF OFF
A5S 190.6 - OFF OFF OFF
A5S Over 136 and up to - ON OFF OFF
B6S 163 - OFF OFF OFF
Over 114.5 and up to
B6S - OFF OFF OFF
136
A6S 114.5 or under - OFF OFF OFF
16
Inch area

DF-621
A3 ON ON ON
Over 261
B4 OFF OFF OFF
Over 286.2 Over 214 and up to
B5 OFF OFF OFF
261
A4 214 or under ON ON ON
Ledger (11 x 17) ON ON ON
Over 284
Legal (8.5 x 14) OFF OFF OFF
Letter S (8.5 x 11) OFF OFF OFF
284
Letter (8.5 x 11) 220 or under ON ON ON
B4 ON ON ON
A4S Over 236.5 and up to Over 186 ON OFF OFF
CONFIGURATION/
B5S 266.2 OFF OFF OFF
OPERATION
B5 186 or under ON ON ON
Legal (8.5 x 14) ON ON OFF
Over 284
Invoice S (8.5 x 5.5) OFF OFF OFF
Over 194 and up to
Letter S (8.5 x 11) ON ON OFF
284
Invoice (8.5 x 5.5) 144 or under ON ON OFF
B5S - OFF OFF OFF
194
Invoice S (8.5 x 5.5) 158.7 or under - OFF OFF OFF
17
China area

DF-621

A3 ON ON ON
8K (270 mm x 390 mm) Over 214 ON ON OFF
A4S OFF OFF OFF
Over 281 Over 199 and up to

A4 ON ON ON
214
Over 152 and up to
16K (195 mm x 270 mm) ON ON OFF
199
A5 152 or under OFF OFF OFF
8K (270 mm x 390 mm) ON ON ON
A4S ON OFF OFF
Over 199
16K S
Over 243 and up to OFF OFF OFF
(195 mm x 270 mm)
281.5
CONFIGURATION/
Over 152 and up to

OPERATION
16K (195 mm x 270 mm) ON ON ON

199
A5 152 or under ON OFF OFF
A4S ON ON OFF
16K S
Over 202.5 and up to Over 152 ON OFF OFF
(195 mm x 270 mm)
243
A5S OFF OFF OFF
A5 152 or under ON ON OFF
16K S
Over 169.5 and up to - ON OFF OFF
(195 mm x 270 mm)
202.5
A5S - OFF OFF OFF
Over 136 and up to
A5S - ON OFF OFF
169.5
A6S 114.5 or under - OFF OFF OFF
18
5.1.2 Original set detection control

• When original is loaded on the document feed tray, the document set sensor detects
DF-621
whether or not there is original.
• If no original is loaded when the document pick-up roller is in the standby position, the
document set sensor actuator blocks the document set sensor and it is determined that
no original is loaded.
• When original is loaded on the document feed tray, the leading edge of the original
pushes the document sensor actuator so that the document set sensor is unblocked. It is
determined that original is loaded.
• When the start key is pressed, the document pick-up roller moves (lowers) to the feed
position, so that the original is fed by the document pick-up roller up to the document
feed roller.
• When the leading edge of the original moves past the document feed roller, the separa-
tion roller sensor is blocked and it is determined that feeding of the original is started.
[3] [2] [1] [5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [6] A143T2C505AA
[1] Document pick-up roller [2] Document feed roller

[3] Separation roller sensor (PS2) [4] Document separation roller
[5] Document stopper (standby position) [6] Document set sensor actuator (no original)
[7] Document set sensor (PS1)
19
5.2 Document feed section

• The document feed section consists of the document pick-up rollers, document feed
DF-621
roller and document separation roller.

• The document feed motor provides the device for the document pick-up section.
• The document feed clutch is connected to the document pick-up section. When the doc-
ument feed clutch is energized, the drive of the document feed motor is transmitted to the
document pick-up section. This rotates the document pick-up section.
• The document separation roller is pressed up against the document feed roller and thus
follows the rotation of the document feed roller.
5.2.1 Pick-up roller up/down control

A. Up control
• When a job is completed, the document feed motor starts rotating backward. Then, the
swing arm mounted on the same shaft as the document feed roller is rotated backward to
thereby raise the document pick-up roller to the standby position.
• The document pick-up roller is fixed at the raised position by a flat spring.
• When the swing arm is raised to the standby position, the document stopper is lowered
CONFIGURATION/
by its own weight and fixed by the lock pawl of the swing arm. The document stopper is
OPERATION
unlocked when the swing arm lowers.

• The document stopper has two functions: one, to align the leading edges of the originals
loaded in the standby state; and, two, to prevent the leading edge of the original from
advancing over the pick-up position into the feed section.
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]

A143T2C506AA
[1] Swing arm (standby position) [2] Document stopper

[3] Swing arm (feed position) [4] Document feed roller
[5] Document pick-up roller
B. Down control
• When the start key is pressed, the document feed motor starts rotating forward and the
document feed clutch is energized. The rotation shaft of the swing arm mounted on the
same shaft as the document feed roller is rotated forward, so that the document pick-up
roller is lowered to the feed position.
• The document stopper is unlocked when the swing arm lowers.
20
5.2.2 Document feed/separation control

• When the start key is pressed, the document feed motor starts rotating forward and the
DF-621
document feed clutch is energized, so that the document feed roller rotates forward (in
the direction of feeding the original).
• The rotation shaft of the swing arm mounted on the same shaft as the document feed
roller is rotated forward, so that the document pick-up roller is lowered to the feed posi-
tion. The document pick-up roller is rotated by a drive belt to thereby feed the original
onto the document feed roller.
A. Separation/feed operation
1. The document separation roller is pressed up against, and driven by, the document
feed roller. A torque limiter is mounted on the shaft of the document separation
roller.
2. The acting pressure of the document feed roller/document separation roller/torque
limiter serves as the limit torque for preventing double feed.
3. When there is no original or only one sheet of original between the document sep-
aration roller and the document feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded and the
separation roller follows the rotation of the document feed roller.
CONFIGURATION/
4. If there are two or more sheets of original between the original separation roller and
OPERATION
the document feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the orig-
inal, so that the document separation roller stops rotating.
5. Because of the stationary document separation roller, the lower sheet of original in
contact with the separation roller is not fed in, so that the first sheet of original is
original separated from the second sheet of original.
[2] [1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[4]
A143T2C507AA
[1] Document feed motor (M2) [2] Document feed clutch (CL1)
[3] Document feed roller [4] Document separation roller
[5] Original
21
B. Periodically replaced parts

• The document pick-up roller, document feed roller, and document separation roller are
periodically replaced parts. These three rollers must be replaced with new ones at the
DF-621
same time.
• None of the document pick-up roller, document feed roller, and document separation
roller is provided with a new article detection mechanism. When the three rollers are
replaced with new ones, the “ADF Feed” counter must be reset to zero using “Counter/
Life” of the Service Mode.
• The number of times the DF has been subjected to paper feed operations can be
checked with the “ADF Feed” counter of the Service Mode.
• For details of the applicable replacement procedures for the document pick-up roller,
document feed roller, and document separation roller and the Service Mode, see Field
Service.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
[3]
[3] [4]
A143T2E014DB
[1] Document feed roller assy [2] Document separation roller assy
[3] Document pick-up roller assy [4] Service Mode/Counter reset screen
22
5.3 Document registration section

• The document feed motor provides the drive for the document registration roller.
DF-621
• The document registration clutch is connected to the document registration roller. When
the document registration clutch is energized, the driving force of the document feed
motor is transmitted to the document registration roller. This rotates the document regis-
tration roller.
• The original will create a loop between the document feed roller (document exit roller for
the second feed of the document for reading of the 2nd side of the original) and the doc-
ument registration roller when the original is being conveyed in order to correct the skew.
5.3.1 Document registration loop formation process

1. The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
2. The document registration roller remains stationary.
3. Because the document feed roller continues rotating to feed the original, a loop is
formed at the leading edge of the original.
4. The loop corrects skew in the original.
5. The document registration roller is started to rotate to transport the original.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2]
[1]
[7] [8]
A143T1C505AA
[1] Document (1st side) [2] Document pick-up roller

[3] Document separation roller [4] Document feed roller
[5] Document registration sensor (PS3) [6] Document registration roller
[7] Document exit roller [8] Document (2nd side)
5.3.2 Adjustment of document registration loop amount

• The amount of the loop of the original can be adjusted in the “Service Mode / ADF / Reg-
istration Loop Adj.”. Changing the adjustment value will change the ON/OFF timing of the
document registration clutch. This varies the amount of loop in the original.
23
5.4 Document reading section

• The document reading motor provides the drive for the document reading roller/1 and 2,
DF-621
and document exit roller.

• The original transported from the document registration section will be transported to the
document exit/switchback section by the document reading roller/1 and 2, and the docu-
ment exit roller.
• When the leading edge of the original moves past the document reading roller/1, the
reading roller sensor (reflector type) disposed downstream of the roller detects the origi-
nal. The length of the original is also detected based on the period of time during which
the sensor remains activated.
[3] [2] [1]

[4]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[10]
[6]
[7] [8] [9]
A143T2C502AA
[1] Document exit roller [2] Document exit roll

[5] Reading roller release motor (M3) [6] Document reading roll
[7] Document reading roller/1 [8] Original glass cleaning roller
[9] Document reading roller/2 [10] Glass cleaning motor (M4)
24
5.4.1 Document reading roller pressure/release control

• When the trailing edge of the original moves past the document reading roller/1, the doc-
DF-621
ument reading roller/1 acts to push the original, so that the document transport speed
increases instantaneously. This results in an image being read unevenly. (Fluctuations in
the document transport speed)
To prevent this problem from occurring, the document reading roller/1 is released using
the reading roller release motor. When the document reading roller/1 is released, no
thrust force is transmitted to the original.
• After the document reading roller/1 is released, the original is transported only by docu-
ment reading roller/2.
A. Pressure/release operation
• When the reading roller release motor is energized, the pressure/release gear is rotated
and the cam mounted on the same shaft as the pressure/release gear is rotated.
• Then, the cam pushes down the rotation shaft of the document reading roll, so that the
document reading roll is released from the document reading roller.
• The pressure/release gear is provided with a semi-circular light blocking plate. When the
gear rotates a half turn, the reading roller release position sensor is unblocked and
CONFIGURATION/
blocked. Then, a condition is detected in which the document reading roller is released.
OPERATION
(Blocked: released; unblocked: pressed)
[1]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
A143T2C508AA
[1] Reading roller release motor (M3) [2] Pressure/release gear

[3] Cam [4] Document reading roller/1
[5] Document reading roll [6] Reading roller release position sensor
(PS12)
25
5.4.2 DF original glass contamination prevention control

A. DF original glass cleaning
DF-621
• A line can occur in the image read from the original if the DF original glass is contami-
nated with dust or dirt. The DF original glass cleaning mechanism prevents this fault from
occurring.
• A half face of the original glass cleaning roller is provided with the original glass cleaning
brush. While the original is being read, the original glass cleaning brush faces up. When
the DF original glass is to be cleaned, the original glass cleaning roller rotates, so that
the original glass cleaning brush faces the DF original glass.
• The original glass cleaning roller rotates to remove dust sticking to the DF original glass.
• The original glass cleaning roller is rotated by the glass cleaning motor. During cleaning,
the original glass cleaning roller rotates forward (counterclockwise in the illustration) and,
when the job is completed, it rotates backward (clockwise in the illustration).
• The drive coupling gear is provided with a cylindrical light blocking plate that is partly cut
out. As the gear rotates, the glass cleaning roller home sensor is unblocked and blocked.
This detects the original glass cleaning brush at its home position. (Blocked: original
reading position; unblocked: home position)
CONFIGURATION/
[2]
OPERATION
[3]
[1]
[1]
[4] [7]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[6]
A143T2C509AA
[1] Original glass cleaning roller [2] Glass cleaning motor (M4)
[3] Glass cleaning roller home sensor (PS13) [4] Original glass cleaning brush
[5] Original glass cleaning roller (home position) [6] DF original glass
[7] Original glass cleaning roller (cleaning posi-
tion)
26
B. DF original glass cleaning operation
Condition Cleaning operation
DF-621
Sub power switch ON Rotates the original glass cleaning brush one complete turn to
Predrive
Existing from sleep check for its correct operation. (forward rotation)
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush one complete turn to
Before starting reading
perform cleaning. (forward rotation: default setting)
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush one complete turn to
perform cleaning for every two originals during continuous
reading of originals. (forward rotation)
Rotates the original glass cleaning brush three complete turns
to perform cleaning for each original during continuous read-
ing of originals, if [Original Setting] → [Despeckle]*1 is
selected. (forward rotation)
During reading Because the original glass cleaning brush is rotated three
complete turns to perform the cleaning, however, the original-
Start key ON
to-original distance is widened than at normal timing. This
results in reduced productivity in reading the originals.
CONFIGURATION/
No original glass cleaning sequence is performed between
OPERATION
originals during continuous reading of originals, if [System2]
→ [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.] → [Feed Cleaning Set-
tings] → [0]*2 is selected in the Service Mode.
The original glass cleaning brush tends to curl if repeatedly
operated in one direction only, resulting in poor cleaning per-
After completing read-
formance. To straighten the brush, it is rotated one complete
ing last original
turn in the backward direction when reading of the last original
is completed. (backward rotation)
*1: Despeckle mode setting screen
A143T2E001DA
27
*2: Feed cleaning settings screen

DF-621
A143T2E002DA
5.5 Document exit section

• The document reading motor provides the drive for the document exit roller. (the same
CONFIGURATION/
drive source as that for the document reading section)

OPERATION
• As the document exit roller rotates forward, the original fed off from the document read-
ing section is fed into the document exit tray (1-sided mode).
• By rotating the document exit roller backward, the original fed off from the document
reading section is subjected to a switchback sequence, so that the original is fed onto the
document second feed section and the 2nd side of the 2-sided original is read.
Turning over the original through the switchback sequence, however, involves the order
of page numbers of the originals becoming out of correct order. To ensure that the origi-
nals are in the correct order of page numbers when fed out, each original is turned over a
second time before being fed out into the document exit tray (each 2-sided original
undergoes switchback operations of a total of two times in the 2-sided mode).
28
[3] [2]
DF-621
[1]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

[12] [11] [10] [1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[8]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[5]
A143T2C511AA
[1] Document exit roller [2] Document registration sensor (PS3)

[3] Document registration roller [4] Document reading roll
[5] Document reading roller/1 [6] Document exit sensor (PS5)
[7] Document reading roller/2 [8] Document exit sensor actuator
[9] Paper guide [10] Document exit roll
29
5.5.1 Document switchback/second feed control (in the 2-sided mode only)
• When the leading edge of the original moves past the document reading roller/2, the
DF-621
document exit sensor disposed downstream of the roller is blocked, which detects the
leading edge of the original.
• When the leading edge of the original reaches the document exit roller, the document
exit roller feeds the original toward the document exit tray side.
• The document reading motor is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the trailing edge of the original has been detected. (At this time, the trailing
edge of the original has moved past the paper guide.)
• The document reading motor is rotated backward. Then, the document exit roller and
document reading roller/1 and 2 are rotated backward to transport the original into the
document second feed section (switchback operation).
• This control is performed in the 2-sided mode only.
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[3] A143T2C512AA
[1] Document exit operation [2] 2-sided original second feed operation
[3] Paper guide
30
5.5.2 Document 2nd side registration control (in the 2-sided mode only)
• When the original reaches the document registration roller, the document registration
DF-621
sensor detects the leading edge of the 2nd side of the original.
• In the same manner as with the 1st side of the original, a loop is formed in the original to
thereby correct any skew in the original. For more details, see “Document registration
section”.
5.5.3 Document exit roller pressure/release control (in the 2-sided mode only)
• After the original has been correctly registered, the document registration roller starts
rotating to feed the original onto the document transport section.
• The document exit roller release solenoid is energized before the leading edge of the
2nd side of the original reaches the document reading roller/1.
• The document exit roller release solenoid pushes down the rotation shaft of the docu-
ment exit roll, which releases the document exit roll from the document exit roller. When
the document exit roll is released, the document transport force is no longer transmitted
to the original. After the document exit roller is released, the original is transported only
by the document registration roller.
CONFIGURATION/
• The document reading motor, which has been rotated backward during the second feed
OPERATION
of the original, is deenergized. The document reading motor is then rotated forward. The
document exit roller and the document reading roller/1 and 2 are rotated forward.
• When the original reaches the document reading roller/1, the original is transported to
the document reading section.
31
DF-621
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1] [5]
[5]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[4]
A143T2C510AA
[1] Document exit roller [2] Document registration roller

[3] Document reading roller/1 [4] Document exit roll
[5] Document exit roller release solenoid (SD1)
32
5.5.4 Faxed document stamp function

• Mounting the optional “Stamp unit SP-501” allows a stamp to be placed on a faxed docu-
DF-621
ment.
• The stamp solenoid located upstream of the document exit roller is energized when the
original is about to be fed out and the stamp mounted on the solenoid plunger is pressed
against the surface of the original. This places a faxed mark (⊕) on the surface of the
original.
• This function is enabled when “System2/Stamp/Set*1 (default setting: Unset)” is turned
ON using the Service Mode and the user selects “Scan settings/Application/TX Stamp*2
(default setting: OFF) on the “FAX/Scan” screen.
• This function is not used for “Copy” or “Scan”.
[2] [1] [4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A143T2C005DA
[1] Original [2] Document exit roller

[3] Stamp solenoid (SD2) [4] Stamp
*1: Stamp mounting setting screen
A143T2E003DA
33
*2: TX Stamp setting screen

DF-621
A143T2E004DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
34
5.6 Original feed operation

A. Document transport operation flow in the 1-sided mode
DF-621
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] A143T2C006DA
[1] Document pick-up roller [2] Document feed roller/

Document separation roller
CONFIGURATION/
[3] Document registration sensor (SP3) [4] Document registration roller
OPERATION
[5] Document reading roller/1 [6] Reading roller sensor (PS4)
1. When the original is set, the document set sensor detects the leading edge of the
original.
2. When the start key is pressed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates one com-
plete turn to clean the original glass.
3. The document pick-up roller lowers and the document stopper is unlocked, so that
the original is transported onto the document feed roller.
4. The document separation roller separates the original one sheet at a time and the
document feed roller feeds the original onto the document registration roller.
6. A registration loop is formed in the original to thereby correct any skew in the origi-
nal.
7. The document registration roller feeds the original onto the document reading
roller/1.
8. The document reading roller/1 feeds the original onto the original glass cleaning
roller and document reading roller/2.
9. The reading roller sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
10. The scanner section reads the image of the 1st side of the original.
11. The document reading roller/2 feeds the original onto the document exit roller.
12. The document exit sensor detects the leading edge of the original.
13. The document reading roller/1 is released.
14. The document exit roller feeds the original out into the document exit tray.
15. When the job is completed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates backward to
clean the original glass
16. The document pick-up roller raises and the document stopper is locked in position.
35
B. Document transport operation flow in the 2-sided mode

• Operation in the 2-sided mode consists of the three processes of “Reading the 1st side”,
“Reading the 2nd side”, and “Rearranging the original in order of page numbers” (so that
DF-621
the original is fed through the DF a total of three times).

(1) Reading the 1st side of the 2-sided original
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] A143T2C006DA

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

1. When the original is set, the document set sensor detects the leading edge of the
original.
2. When the start key is pressed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates one com-
plete turn to clean the original glass.
3. The document pick-up roller lowers and the document stopper is unlocked, so that
the original is transported onto the document feed roller.
4. The document separation roller separates the original one sheet at a time and the
document feed roller feeds the original onto the document registration roller.
nal.
roller/1.
10. The scanner section reads the image of the 1st side of the original.
36
(2) Reading the 2nd side of the 2-sided original
[3] [2] [1]
DF-621
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] A143T2C007DA

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[7] Document exit sensor (PS5) [8] Document reading roller/2
[9] Document exit roller
14. The document exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the original.
15. The document exit roller stops rotating and then starts rotating backward to trans-
port the original onto the document registration roller.
16. The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the 2nd side of the 2-
sided original.
nal.
roller/1.
19. The document exit roller is released.
20. The document reading roller/1 and 2 and the document exit roller stop rotating and
then start rotating forward.
23. The scanner section reads the image of the 2nd side of the 2-sided original.
37
(3) Rearranging the original in order of page numbers

• When the 2nd side of the original is read, the original is turned over and fed through the
DF. If the original is fed out directly into the document exit tray, the order of page numbers
DF-621
of the original becomes out of correct order. To prevent this from occurring, the original is
turned over a second time and fed through the DF after its 2nd side has been read.
• At this time, the image of the original is not read.
• This operation is performed even if the 2-sided original is a one-page original.
27. The document exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the original.
28. The document exit roller stops rotating and then starts rotating backward to trans-
port the original onto the document registration roller.
29. The document registration sensor detects the leading edge of the 2nd side of the 2-
sided original.
nal.
roller/1.
32. The document exit roller is released.
33. The document reading roller/1 and 2 and the document exit roller stop rotating and
CONFIGURATION/
then start rotating forward.

OPERATION
39. The document exit roller feeds the original out into the document exit tray.
40. When the job is completed, the original glass cleaning roller rotates backward to
clean the original glass.
41. The document pick-up roller raises and the document stopper is locked in position.
38
5.7 Raised/lowered position detection mechanism

5.7.1 Document exchange detection control
DF-621
• An angle detection mechanism is provided to detect the operation of exchanging origi-
nals when the DF is used as the original cover of the main body.
• When the DF is raised to an angle of about 20 degrees or more, the detection lever is
pushed up by a spring. The angle sensor that has been blocked by the detection lever is
now unblocked. It is, as a result, detected that the DF “is raised to an angle of 20 degrees
or more”.
• When, on the other hand, the DF is lowered to an angle of about 20 degrees or less, the
detection lever is pushed down. Then, the angle sensor, which has been unblocked, is
blocked, so that it is detected that the DF “is lowered to an angle of 20 degrees or less”.
• When the DF state undergoes changes from a condition of being fully lowered to a condi-
tion of “being raised to an angle of 20 degrees or more” and then to a condition of “being
lowered to an angle of 20 degrees or less”, it is determined that “an original is placed
manually on the original glass”.
5.7.2 DF raised/lowered position detection mechanism
CONFIGURATION/
• The DF raised/lowered position detection mechanism is provided to detect that the DF or
OPERATION
the original cover is raised or lowered.
• The magnet installed in the DF is brought near to the original cover switch (reed switch)
at the scanner section when the DF is lowered. This actuates the original cover switch.
Then, the main body determines that the DF is lowered.
• When determining that “a document is placed manually on the original glass” through the
“document exchange detection control” described above, the main body starts perform-
ing the control of detecting the size of the original placed on the original glass.
• If the DF is raised to an angle of 20 degrees or less, the main body does not perform the
control of detecting the size of the original placed on the original glass.
[1] [2] A143T2C012DA
[1] Angle sensor (PS202) [2] Original cover switch (RX201)
39
5.8 Cooling inside the unit

• The DF cooling fan motor functions to cool the DF control board, document feed motor,
DF-621
and document reading motor in the DF.

• It discharges heat generated inside the DF out through the exhaust port.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A143T2C013DA
[1] DF control board (DFCB) [2] DF cooling fan motor (FM1)
40
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
PC-109/PC-208
PC-109/PC-208
OUTLINE
2. PAPRE FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
OUTLINE
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
3.2 Mechanical parts configuration............................................................................. 4
4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 5
CONFIGURATION/
5. MECHANISM .......................................................................................................... 6
OPERATION
5.1 Operation .............................................................................................................. 6
5.1.1 Up/down control ............................................................................................ 6
5.1.2 Paper feed control ....................................................................................... 10
5.1.3 Paper size detection control........................................................................ 17
5.1.4 Paper level detection control ....................................................................... 19
5.1.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism ............................................................ 22
i
PC-109/PC-208
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
PC-109/PC-208
A. Type
Name 1 way paper feed cabinet / 2 way paper feed cabinet

Type Front loading type 1 way paper feed device / 2 way paper feed device
Installation Desk type
OUTLINE
B. Paper
Capacity
Type Size
Tray 3 Tray 4
A5S (Metric area only),
B5, B5S, A4, A4S, B4, A3,
Plain paper 5-1/2 x 8-1/2S (Inch area only),
500 sheets 500 sheets
(60 to 90 g/m2, 16 to 24 lb) 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11S,
8-1/2 x 14, 11 x 17
8K, 16K
139.7 to 297 mm
Width
5.5 to 11.7 inch
Copy paper dimensions
182 to 431.8 mm
Length
7.2 to 17 inch
C. Machine specifications
DC 24 V ± 10% (supplied from the main body)

Power requirements
DC 5 V ± 5%
Max. power consumption 15 W or less
600 mm (W) x 603 mm (D) x 325 mm (H)
Dimensions
PC-109: 29.0 kg (63.93 lb)
Weight
PC-208: 34.0 kg (74.95 lb)
D. Operating environment
NOTE
1
2. PAPRE FEED PATH

PC-109/PC-208
[1]
[2]
[3]
OUTLINE
[4]
A1V4T1C001DA
[1] Paper feed from the 3rd tray [2] Transportation to main body
[3] Transportation in PC [4] Paper feed from the 4th tray
2
PC-109/PC-208
3. CONFIGURATION
[21] [22] [23] [1] [2]

[20] [3]
[4]
[19]
[18]
[17] [5]
[16]
[15] [6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[14]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[13] [10]
[12]
[11] A1V4T2C500AA
[1] Right lower door sensor (PS39) [2] Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS33)
[3] Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) [4] Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) *
[5] Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS34) [6] Tray4 empty sensor (PS44) *
[7] Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS43) * [8] Tray4 vertical transport motor (M42) *
[9] * [10] Tray4 near empty sensor (PS42) *
Tray4 paper feed motor (M41)
[11] Tray4 lift-up motor (M43) * [12] Tray4 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS47) *
[13] Tray4 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS48) * [14] Tray4 paper FD sensor board (PSDTB41) *
[15] Tray4 detection sensor (PS41) * [16] Tray3 paper FD sensor board (PSDTB31)
[17] Tray3 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS38) [18] Tray3 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS37)
[19] Tray3 detection sensor (PS31) [20] Tray3 lift-up motor (M33)
[21] Tray3 near empty sensor (PS32) [22] Tray3 paper feed motor (M31)
[23] Tray3 vertical transport motor (M32)
*: Dedicated to PC-208.
3
3.2 Mechanical parts configuration

PC-109/PC-208
[1]
[13] [2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10] [5]
[6]
[9]
CONFIGURATION/
[7]
OPERATION
[8]
A1V4T2C501AA
[1] Tray 3 vertical transport roller [2] Tray 3 vertical transport roll
[3] Tray 3 separation roller *2 [4] Tray 4 vertical transport roll *1
[5] Tray 4 vertical transport roller *1 [6] Tray 3 paper guide (CD)
[7] Tray 4 paper guide (CD) *1 [8] Tray 4 paper lift-up plate *1
[9] Tray 4 paper guide (FD) *1 [10] Tray 3 paper guide (FD)
[11] Tray 3 paper lift-up plate [12] Tray 3 pick-up roller *2
[13] Tray 3 paper feed roller *2
*1: Dedicated to PC-208.

*2: The paper feed roller is arranged in the same way in tray 3 and tray 4. If the description
that follows is not identified with tray 3 or tray 4, it is applicable to both tray 3 and tray 4
in terms of mechanism and control.
4
4. DRIVE
PC-109/PC-208
[13] [14]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7]
A1V4T2C502AA
[1] Tray 3 vertical transport roller [2] Tray 3 vertical transport roll
[3] Tray 3 paper feed roller [4] Tray 3 separation roller
[5] Tray 4 vertical transport roll * [6] Tray 4 vertical transport roller *
[7] Tray 4 paper feed roller * [8] Tray 4 separation roller *
[9] * [10] Tray 3 pick-up roller
Tray 4 pick-up roller
[11] Tray4 vertical transport motor (M42) * [12] Tray4 paper feed motor (M41) *
[13] Tray3 paper feed motor (M31) [14] Tray3 vertical transport motor (M32)
• The drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray 3 and tray 4. If the description that
follows is not identified with tray 3 or tray 4, it is applicable to both tray 3 and tray 4 in
terms of mechanism and control.
• The paper feed motor of each paper feed tray drive the tray 3 and tray 4 paper feed roller
section.
• The vertical transport motor of each paper feed tray drive the tray 3 and tray 4 vertical
transport roller section.
5
5. MECHANISM Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
5. MECHANISM
PC-109/PC-208
5.1 Operation
• The tray 3 and tray 4 are controlled in the same control procedure.
A. Up operation
• The paper lift-up plate B is located under the paper lift-up plate A.
• The lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is connected to the paper lift-up plate B.
• When the drive shaft of the lift-up motor rotates, the paper lift-up plate B raises the paper
lift-up plate A.
[4]
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[3] [2]
A1UDT2C998AA
[1] Lift-up motor (M33/M44) [2] Paper lift-up plate B

[3] Paper lift-up plate A [4] Upper limit sensor (PS33/PS43)
6
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 5. MECHANISM
(1) Upper position
PC-109/PC-208
[1]
[2] [2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [4] [3]
A1V4T2C999AB
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] Actuator of upper limit Upper position [2] Light blocking plate of Lower position
sensor (paper full) upper limit sensor (unblocked)
[3] Paper lift-up plate A Upper position [4] Upper limit sensor Unblocked
(PS33/PS43)
[5] Paper lift-up plate B Upper position
7
B. Down operation
PC-109/PC-208
• When the paper feed tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the lift-up motor and
the lift-up plate drive shaft are disconnected from each other.
• When the driving force of the lift-up motor is released from the lift-up plate drive shaft, the
paper lift-up plate starts lowering by its own weight.
(1) Down position
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5] [4]
[3]
A1V4T2C009DA
[1] Actuator of upper limit Lower position [2] Light blocking plate of Upper position
sensor (Low paper level upper limit sensor (Blocked)
or open paper
feed tray)
[3] Paper lift-up plate A Lower position [4] Upper limit sensor Blocked
(PS33/PS43)
[5] Paper lift-up plate B Lower position
8
C. Operation timing
PC-109/PC-208
(1) When the paper feed tray is slid in
The machine then determines that the paper feed tray is slid into position.
• The paper lift-up plate is at the lower position when the paper feed tray is slid out, so that
the upper limit sensor is unblocked.
• Determining that the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the lift-up motor
rotate to start the up operation of the paper lift-up plate.
paper lift-up plate has been started, the upper limit sensor is blocked.
• Determining that the upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up motor to
complete the up operation of the paper lift-up plate.
at one time.
• If the paper feed tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lift-up plate and
accordingly the tray detection sensor is unblocked, the up operation of the paper lift-up
plate is terminated.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
A1UDT2C997AA
[1] Paper feed tray [2] Detection plate

[3] Tray detection sensor (PS31/PS41) [4] Near empty sensor (PS32/PS42)
(2) During a print cycle

• When the amount of paper decreases as the machine keeps printing, the pick-up roller
will gradually come down to unblock the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate
again to lift up the paper lift-up plate.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to complete the up
operation of the paper lift-up plate.
9

PC-109/PC-208
• The tray 3 and tray 4 are controlled in the same control procedure.
A. Pick-up control
• The paper feed motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after
the print start signal.
• The driving force of the paper feed motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and paper
feed roller. These rollers rotate to pick up and feed a sheet of paper into the machine.
• The separation roller is driven via a torque limiter in a direction opposite the paper trans-
port direction.
• The separation roller is pressed up against the paper feed roller by the pressure of a
spring and an acting pressure generated from torque of the torque limiter.
and the paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded and the separation roller follows
CONFIGURATION/
the rotation of the paper feed roller.

OPERATION
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and the paper feed
roller is rotated backward.
• The backward rotation of the separation roller causes the lower sheet of paper in contact
with the separation roller to be pushed backward in the direction of the paper feed tray,
so that the lower sheet of paper is properly separated.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] A1UDT2C994AA

10
C. Paper feed retry control
PC-109/PC-208
• If the specified sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of a predeter-
mined period of time after the start of the paper feed sequence, the machine determines
that there is a paper misfeed. The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a
paper misfeed is detected in a print job. A paper misfeed results if the specified sensor is
still unable to detect the paper even after the paper feed retry sequence, the machine
determines that there is a paper misfeed.
Paper feed
Paper port Sensor name
retry control
❍ Tray 3 (Option: PC-109/208) Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS36)
❍ Tray 4 (Option: PC-208) Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS46)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
11
D. Paper feed control

PC-109/PC-208
(1) Paper transport path

[1]
[2]
[3]
[17]
[16]
[4]
[15]
CONFIGURATION/
[14]
OPERATION
[12] [13]
[11]
[10]
[9] [5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
A1V4T2C507AA

[3] Paper transport to registration section [4] Paper transport in tray 2 vertical transport
section
[5] Paper transport in tray 3/4 vertical transport [6] Tray 4 *

section
[7] Paper transport from tray 4 * [8] Tray 4 paper feed roller *
[9] Tray 4 vertical transport roller * [10] Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS46) *
[11] Tray 3 [12] Paper transport from tray 3
[13] Tray 3 paper feed roller [14] Tray 3 vertical transport roller
[15] Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS36) [16] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS28)
[17] Tray 2 vertical transport roller
12
(2) Tray 3
PC-109/PC-208
• The tray3 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray 3 vertical transport
roller detects the paper fed from the tray 3 paper feed roller.
• The tray 3 vertical transport roller feeds the paper onto the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
• The tray 2 vertical transport sensor located upstream of the tray 2 vertical transport roller
detects the paper fed from the tray 3 vertical transport roller.
• The tray 2 vertical transport roller feeds the paper onto the registration roller.
• The registration sensor located upstream of the registration roller detects the paper fed
from the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
• When the paper fed from the tray 3 paper feed roller moves past the tray 3 vertical trans-
port roller and reaches a predetermined position, the tray3 paper feed motor is deener-
gized to disconnect the driving force. The tray 3 pick-up roller and tray 3 paper feed roller
• If the tray3 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of
a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed.
The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is detected
CONFIGURATION/
(paper feed retry control). If the tray3 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect the
OPERATION
paper, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed at tray 3 and displays the
message of “PAPER JAM” on the control panel.
• If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of
a predetermined period of time at the leading edge of the paper has moved past the
tray3 vertical transport sensor, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed at
the tray 3 vertical transport section and displays the message of “PAPER JAM” on the
control panel. For details of paper misfeed detection conditions, see “Service Manual /
Field Service / Troubleshooting / List of Jam Code” for the main body.
13
(3) Tray 4
PC-109/PC-208
roller detects the paper fed from the tray 4 paper feed roller.
roller detects the paper fed from the tray 4 vertical transport roller.
• The tray 2 vertical transport sensor located upstream of the tray 2 vertical transport roller
detects the paper fed from the tray 3 vertical transport roller.
• The tray 2 vertical transport roller feeds the paper onto the registration roller.
• The registration sensor located upstream of the registration roller detects the paper fed
from the tray 2 vertical transport roller.
• When the tray4 vertical transport sensor disposed downstream of the tray 4 vertical
transport roller on the paper feed path detects the leading edge of the paper fed from the
tray 4 paper feed roller, the tray4 paper feed motor is deenergized to disconnect the driv-
ing force.The tray 4 pick-up roller and tray 4 paper feed roller follow the movement of the
paper, continuing rotating. The tray 4 pick-up roller and tray 4 paper feed roller stop rotat-
CONFIGURATION/
ing as soon as the paper moves past them.

OPERATION
• When the paper fed from the tray 4 paper feed roller moves past the tray 4 vertical trans-
port roller and reaches a predetermined position, the tray4 paper feed motor is deener-
gized to disconnect the driving force. The tray 4 pick-up roller and tray 4 paper feed roller
a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed.
The paper feed sequence is repeated a second time, if a paper misfeed is detected
(paper feed retry control). If the tray4 vertical transport sensor is still unable to detect the
paper, the machine determines that there is a paper misfeed at tray 4 and displays the
message of “PAPER JAM” on the control panel.
control panel.
• If the tray 2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the paper even after the lapse of
control panel.
Troubleshooting / List of Jam Code” for the main body.
14
E. Paper misfeed display
PC-109/PC-208
NOTE
tem 2/ JAM Code Display Setting” of the Service Mode.
(1) Tray3 (typical)
CONFIGURATION/
A1V4T2E003DA
OPERATION
(2) Tray4 (typical)
A1V4T2E004DA
(3) System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting
A1UDT2E003DA
15
F. Periodically replaced parts

PC-109/PC-208
“3rd.” or “4th.” counter must be reset to zero using “Counter/ Life” of the Service Mode.
• The number of times tray 3/tray 4 has been subjected to paper feed operations can be
checked with the “3rd./4th.” counter of the Service Mode.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1V4T2E005DB
[1] Paper feed roller/Pick-up roller [2] Service Mode/Counter reset screen
/Separation roller
16
PC-109/PC-208
• The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of CD
paper size sensor/1 and CD paper size sensor/2 being unblocked or blocked.
• The CD paper size sensor/1 and CD paper size sensor/2 are unblocked or blocked by the
paper width detection plate provided in the paper width guide plate.

• The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or
OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on the paper FD sensor board.
• Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate con-
nected to the paper length guide plate.
[1] [2] [3]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
A1UDT2C992AA
[1] CD paper size sensor/2 (PS38/PS48) [2] Tray detection sensor (PS31/PS41)
[3] CD paper size sensor/1 (PS37/PS47) [4] Detection plate
[11] Paper FD sensor board
(PSDTB31/PSDTB41)
17
C. Paper size determination

PC-109/PC-208
• Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will
decide a paper size.
Paper FD sensor board Paper CD size Paper CD size

Paper size
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 detect sensor/1 detect sensor/2
A3 OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF Blocked Unblocked
B4 OFF OFF OFF ON Blocked Unblocked
A4S ON ON/OFF OFF OFF Unblocked Unblocked
A4 ON/OFF ON ON ON Blocked Unblocked
B5S ON ON OFF ON Unblocked Unblocked
B5 OFF OFF ON ON Blocked Unblocked
A5S
ON/OFF ON ON ON Unblocked Unblocked
Invoice S
Ledger (11 × 17) OFF ON OFF OFF Blocked Blocked
Legal (8-1/2 × 14) OFF OFF OFF ON Unblocked Unblocked
Letter S
CONFIGURATION/
OFF ON ON OFF Unblocked Unblocked

(8-1/2 × 11 S)
OPERATION
Letter (8- /2 × 11)

1
ON ON ON ON Blocked Blocked
FLS * OFF OFF OFF OFF Unblocked Unblocked
K8 S (270 mm ×
OFF OFF ON OFF Blocked Blocked
390 mm)
K16 (270 mm ×
OFF ON ON ON Blocked Blocked
195 mm)
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.
220 x 330 mm, 8 × 13, 81/8 × 131/4, 81/4 × 13, 81/2 × 13
Switch/sensor states
Physical state
Switch/sensor
HIGH signal LOW signal
Paper FD sensor board: Switches 1 to 4 OFF ON
Tray3 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
Blocked Unblocked
Tray4 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
18
PC-109/PC-208
• The paper level detection control is performed under any of the following conditions:
“Tray 3/tray 4 is closed in position”
“The up/down control of the paper lift-up plate is completed”
A. Paper near-empty detection

• The near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the paper feed tray.
• As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the
lift-up plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is raised.
• When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the near empty
sensor is blocked, the machine detects a near-empty condition.
• A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use
becomes about 50 ± 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
A1V4T2C505AA
[1] Near empty sensor (PS32/PS42) [2] Actuator

[3] Paper lift-up plate B (upper position) [4] Lift-up motor (M33/M43)
[5] Pick-up roller [6] Paper lift-up plate A (upper position)
19
B. Paper empty detection

PC-109/PC-208
• The tray 3 and tray 4 use the same control system to detect a paper empty condition.
• A paper empty condition is detected by the tray detection sensor, upper limit sensor, and
paper empty sensor.
• Based on the combination of detection signals from each of the sensors, a paper empty
condition is detected.
Sensor Paper empty

Paper empty sensor Unblocked
Tray detection sensor Blocked
Upper limit sensor Unblocked
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[4]
A1V4T2C084DA

[3] Paper empty detection plate [4] Paper empty sensor (PS34/PS44)
(Lower position: paper empty)
[5] Upper limit sensor (PS33/PS43) [6] Paper empty detection plate
(Upper position: paper remaining)
20
C. Paper level display
PC-109/PC-208
• The paper level is indicated by the LED on the right side of each paper feed tray and by
the screen of the control panel.
Other statuses
Paper feed tray
condition
conditions)
*: The LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode/System 1/
Machine State LED Setting/Paper Remainder.
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
[4]
OPERATION
[5] [6]
A1V4T2E006DA
[3] Tray3 LED board (LEDB31) [3] Tray3 LED board (LEDB51)
(For option PC-109/208) (For option PC-409)
(For option PC-208)
21
5.1.5 Paper feed tray locking mechanism

PC-109/PC-208
• The paper feed tray is provided with a locking mechanism.
A. Unlocking the paper feed tray

• Withdrawing the knob of the paper feed tray to the front will disengage the tray lock pawl
provided on the right side of the paper feed tray.
• The paper feed tray can be pulled out of the machine by continuing pulling the knob with
the tray lock pawl disengaged.
• Rollers are provided for the right and left tray rails. They reduce the operating force
required for sliding in/out the paper feed tray.
B. Locking the paper feed tray

• Pushing the knob of the paper feed tray all the way toward the rear will allow the paper
feed tray to be slid into the machine.
• When the paper feed tray is inserted all the way in place, the tray lock pawl provided on
the right side of the paper feed tray locks the tray in place.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
[4]
[4]
[4] [3]
A1UDT2C988AA
[1] Lock pawl [2] Lock lever

[3] Knob [4] Roller
22
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
PC-409
PC-409
OUTLINE
2. PAPRE FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
OUTLINE
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
3.1 Section configuration ............................................................................................ 3
3.3 Mechanical parts configuration............................................................................. 5
CONFIGURATION/
4. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 6
OPERATION
4.1 Up/down control.................................................................................................... 6
4.1.1 Up operation ................................................................................................. 6
4.1.2 Down operation ............................................................................................. 6
4.1.3 Operation timing............................................................................................ 7
4.2 Paper feed control............................................................................................... 10
4.2.1 Pick-up control ............................................................................................ 10
4.2.2 Separation control ....................................................................................... 11
4.2.3 Paper level detection control ....................................................................... 12
4.2.4 Paper empty detection ................................................................................ 13
4.3 Paper shift control............................................................................................... 14
4.3.1 Overview of paper shift operation ............................................................... 14
4.3.2 Division board drive mechanism ................................................................. 14
4.3.3 Shifter drive mechanism ............................................................................. 15
4.4 Paper misfeed display......................................................................................... 16
4.5 Paper level display .............................................................................................. 17
4.6 Periodically replaced parts ................................................................................. 18
i
PC-409
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
PC-409
A. Type
Name Large capacity cabinet

Type Front loading type LCC
Installation Desk type
OUTLINE
B. Paper
Type Size Capacity

Plain paper Metric area: A4,
2,500 sheets
(60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)) Inch area: 8 1/2 x 11
DC 24 V ± 10% (supplied from the main body)

Power requirements
DC 5 V ± 5%
Max. power consumption 45 W or less
600 mm (W) x 603 mm (D) x 325 mm (H)
Dimensions
Weight 33.0 kg (72.75 lb)
NOTE
1
2. PAPRE FEED PATH

PC-409
[1]
[2]
OUTLINE
[4]
[5] [3]
A1V4T1C002DA
[1] Paper feed from LCC [2] Transportation to main body

[3] Main tray [4] Move from the shift tray to the main tray
[5] Shift tray
2
3. CONFIGURATION
PC-409
3.1 Section configuration
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3] [2]
A1V4T2C509AA
[1] Paper feed section [2] Main tray section

[3] Shift tray section
3

PC-409
[1] [2]
[25] [3]
[24] [4]
[23] [5]
[6]
[22]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[21]
[11]
CONFIGURATION/
[12]
OPERATION
[20] [13]
[19] [14]
[15]
[16]
[18] [17]
A1V4T2C510AA
[1] Paper feed motor (M51) [2] Vertical transport motor (M52)
[3] Right lower door sensor (PS55) [4] Vertical transport sensor (PS52)
[5] Lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54) [6] Paper feed sensor (PS51)
[7] Paper empty sensor (PS53) [8] Tray3 LED board (LEDB51)
[9] Elevator motor sensor (PS5A) [10] Elevator motor (M55)
[11] Lift-down over run sensor (PS57) [12] Main tray paper empty board (MTPEB)
[13] Shift motor sensor (PS58) [14] Shift motor (M54)
[15] Manual down control board (MDCB) [16] Lift-down lower limit sensor (PS5D)
[17] Shifter stop position sensor (PS5B) [18] Shift tray empty sensor (PS59)
[19] Shifter home position sensor (PS5C) [20] Division board position motor (M53)
[21] Division board position sensor (PS5E) [22] PC relay board (PCREYB)
[23] PC control board (PCCB51) [24] Tray lock solenoid (SD51)
[25] Tray detection sensor (PS56)
4
3.3 Mechanical parts configuration

[1]
PC-409
[2]
[3]
[21] [4]
[20]
[19]
[5]
[18]
[6]
[7]
[8]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[17]
[9]
[16]
[10]
[15]
[14] [11]
[13]
[12] A1V4T2C511AA
[3] Tray 3 vertical transport roller [4] Paper feed roller
[5] Separation roller [6] Pick-up roller
[7] Elevator motor (M55) [8] Elevator take-up axis
[9] Shifter drive shaft [10] Shift motor (M54)
[11] Division board (front) [12] Division board drive plate
[13] Shifter (shift position) [14] Shifter (home position)
[15] Shifter drive belt [16] Shift tray
[17] Division board position motor (M53) [18] Division board (rear)
[19] Main tray [20] Tray lock lever
[21] Tray lock solenoid (SD51)
5
4. OPERATION
4.1 Up/down control
PC-409
4.1.1 Up operation
• A lifting cable is connected to the main tray and the main tray is held in the horizontal
position by the elevator take-up axis.
• When the elevator motor rotates forward, the elevator take-up axis takes up the cable to
thereby raise the main tray.
4.1.2 Down operation

• When the elevator motor rotates backward, the elevator take-up axis reels out the cable
to thereby lower the main tray.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[6] [5] [4]
A1V4T2C512AA
[1] Lifting cable [2] Main tray

[3] Lift-down over run sensor (PS57) [4] Elevator take-up axis
[5] Elevator motor (M55) [6] Main tray paper empty board (MTPEB)
6
4.1.3 Operation timing

A. When the paper feed tray is slid in
PC-409
The machine then determines that the paper feed tray is slid in position.
• The main tray is lowering when the paper feed tray is slid out, so that the lift-up upper
limit sensor is unblocked.
• Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the elevator
motor rotate forward to start the up operation of the main tray.
• When the paper stack on the main tray is raised to a predetermined level after the up
operation of the main tray is started, the paper pushes up the actuator, so that the actua-
tor blocks the lift-up upper limit sensor.
• Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the elevator
motor to complete the up operation of the main tray.
at one time.
• If the manual down key is pressed during the up operation of the main tray, the machine
terminates the up operation of the main tray.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
A1V4T2C513AA
[1] Paper feed roller [2] Actuator

[3] Pick-up roller [4] Lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54)
[5] Paper pushing up the actuator
7
B. During a print cycle

• As paper is consumed, the pick-up roller gradually lowers and the lift-up upper limit sen-
sor is unblocked.
PC-409
• Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the elevator
motor rotate forward to start the up operation of the main tray.
main tray has been started, the actuator blocks the lift-up upper limit sensor.
• Determining that the lift-up upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the elevator
motor to complete the up operation of the main tray.
[1]
[6]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[5]
[4]
A1V4T2C514AA
[1] Actuator [2] Lift-up upper limit sensor (PS54)

[3] Pick-up roller [4] When the paper level lowers, the main tray is
raised.
[5] Separation roller [6] Paper feed roller
C. During manual down operation

• When the manual down key is pressed, the elevator motor rotates backward. As the ele-
vator motor rotates backward, the elevator take-up axis reels out the cable to thereby
lower the main tray.
• When the main tray lowers and the lift-down lower limit sensor detects the lower limit
position (the sensor is blocked), the elevator motor stops rotating backward.
• When the lift-down over run detection gear blocks the lift-down over run sensor while the
main tray is lowering, the main body determines that there is a condition of “LCT Lift Fail-
ure”.
• When the main tray lowers to the lower limit position, the tray lock solenoid is energized.
This disengages the tray lock lever from the paper feed tray and thus unlocks the paper
feed tray. The paper feed tray is then pushed to the front (several centimeters) by a
spring. Then, the paper feed tray can be slid out.
• The paper feed tray cannot be slid out when the main tray is in the raised position. The
press of the manual down key does not unlock the paper feed tray, either, if the power is
turned OFF.
• If it is absolutely necessary to slide out the paper feed tray with the power turned OFF in
order to service the machine or for similar purposes, a screwdriver or a similar bar may
be inserted into the “tray unlock hole” provided in the back panel of the paper feed unit.
This disengages the tray lock lever, so that the paper feed tray can be slid out.
8
[1]
PC-409
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[10]
[7] [9]
[6] [8] A1V4T2C515AA
[1] Main tray [2] Lift-down lower limit sensor (PS5D)

[3] Elevator motor (M55) [4] Lift-down over run sensor (PS57)
[5] Elevator take-up axis [6] Paper feed tray
[7] Manual down key [8] Tray lock lever
(Manual down control board MDCB)
[9] Tray unlock hole [10] Tray lock solenoid (SD51)
9
4.2 Paper feed control

4.2.1 Pick-up control
PC-409
• The paper feed motor is energized by the print start signal.

• The pick-up roller and paper feed roller pick up a sheet of paper and transports it onto
the paper feed roller by the driving force of the paper feed motor.
• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the vertical transport roller.
• The paper feed motor is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time
after the paper feed sensor detects the leading edge of the paper.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to
rotate.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[8]
[7]
[6]
A1V4T2C516AA
[3] Vertical transport roller [4] Vertical transport sensor (PS52)
[5] Paper feed roller [6] Paper feed sensor (PS51)
[7] Separation roller [8] Pick-up roller
10
4.2.2 Separation control

• The separation roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper
PC-409
transport direction.
• The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pressure
generated by pressure of the spring and torque of the torque limiter.
• The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, separation roller, and the torque limiter
serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.
• If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the separation roller and
the paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded, so that the separation roller follows the
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the separation roller and the paper feed
roller rotates backward.
• The backward rotation of the separation roller allows the lower sheet of paper in contact
with the separation roller to be returned back into the main tray. This properly separates
the sheets of paper.
[1] [2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4] A1UDT2C994AA

11

A. Paper near-empty detection of the main tray
PC-409
• The paper level of the main tray is determined by counting the number of times the eleva-
tor motor sensor is activated/deactivated. The count is then calculated to determine a
corresponding paper level.
• The paper level is measured when the power is turned ON, the power save mode is
released and a paper feed tray is inserted.
Count
Determination of main tray paper level 194 or
30 or less 31 to 193
(paper level determination accuracy ± 31 over
sheets) 1,250
(194 - count) X 61 ÷ 8 sheets 0 sheets
sheets
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1V4T2C517AA
[1] Elevator motor (M55) [2] Elevator motor sensor (PS5A)
B. Paper near-empty detection of the shift tray

• The shifter home position sensor and shift tray empty sensor detect the paper level of the
shift tray.
• If the shift tray empty sensor detects paper (is blocked) when the shifter is at the home
position, the paper level of the shift tray is determined to be 1,250 (sheets). If the shift
tray empty sensor detects no paper (is unblocked), the paper level of the shift tray is
determined to be 0 (sheets).
C. Paper level determination control

• The total number of sheets still available for use on the main tray and the shift tray is
translated to a corresponding number of sheets in unit of 50 sheets (0 to 50 steps) to
serve as the paper level.
No. of steps
Paper level determination 3 or less 4 to 50
Paper near empty Paper loaded
12
4.2.4 Paper empty detection

A. Paper empty detection of the main tray
PC-409
• The main tray paper empty board and paper empty sensor detect a paper empty condi-
tion of the main tray.
• The machine determines that there is a paper empty condition in the main tray, if the
reflector type photosensor on the main tray paper empty board mounted on the frame of
the paper feed cabinet detects no paper and the paper empty sensor is unblocked.
• When the paper empty condition of the main tray is detected, the shifter is operated and
the paper stack loaded in the shift tray is moved onto the main tray.
[1]
[3] [2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[8]
[5] [7]
[6]
A1V4T2C518AA
[1] Paper empty sensor (PS53) [2] Main tray

[3] Shifter [4] Shift tray
[5] Shifter home position sensor (PS5C) [6] Shift tray empty sensor (PS59)
[7] Shifter stop position sensor (PS5B) [8] Main tray paper empty board (MTPEB)
B. Paper empty detection of the shift tray

• The shift tray empty sensor and shift home position sensor detect a paper empty condi-
tion of the shift tray.
• The machine determines that there is a paper empty condition in the shift tray, if the shift
tray empty sensor is unblocked with the shifter located at its home position.
C. Paper empty condition determination control

• When a paper empty condition is detected in both the main tray and the shift tray, the
machine determines that the paper feed tray runs out of paper and displays a paper
empty message on the control panel.
13
4.3 Paper shift control

4.3.1 Overview of paper shift operation
PC-409
• When a paper empty condition of the main tray is detected, the shifter is operated and
the paper stack loaded in the shift tray is moved onto the main tray.
A. Operation
1. The main tray is lowered to the lift-down lower limit position.
2. The division board moves from the home position to the retracted position.
3. The shifter moves from the home position to the stop position. This allows the
paper stack loaded in the shift tray to be moved onto the main tray.
4. The shifter returns to the home position.
5. The division board returns from the retracted position to the home position.
6. The main tray is raised.
4.3.2 Division board drive mechanism

• The division board position motor drives the division board.
• When the division board position motor is energized, the division board drive gear is
CONFIGURATION/
rotated, so that the division board drive plate moves to the front or rear. As a result, the
OPERATION
division boards at the front and rear move from the home position to the retracted posi-
tion.
• The division board drive gear is provided with a light blocking plate. Accordingly, rotation
of the division board drive gear blocks or unblocks the division board position sensor.
The position of the division board is detected by the position of the light blocking plate.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
A1V4T2C523AA
[1] Division board (rear) [2] Division board drive gear

[3] Division board position sensor (PS5E) [4] Division board position motor (M53)
[5] Division board drive plate [6] Division board (front)
14
4.3.3 Shifter drive mechanism

• The shift motor drives the shifter.
PC-409
• When the shift motor rotates forward, the shifter drive belt rotates, so that the shifter
moves from the home position to the stop position. When the shift motor rotates back-
ward, the shifter moves from the stop position to the home position.
• The shifter home position sensor, shifter stop position sensor, and shift motor sensor
detect the position of the shifter.
• If the shifter is in contact with the paper stack loaded in the main tray after the paper
stack is moved from the shift tray to the main tray, the up operation of the main tray may
be impeded by friction. The shift motor is therefore rotated backward for a predetermined
number of pulses after the shifter is brought to a stop and the shifter is thereby moved
toward the home position. The shift motor sensor detects the amount of the backward
rotation of the shift motor.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[4]
[3]
A1V4T2C520AA
[1] Shifter stop position sensor (PS5B) [2] Shifter

[3] Shifter home position sensor (PS5C) [4] Shift motor (M54)
[5] Shift motor sensor (PS58)
15
4.4 Paper misfeed display

PC-409
NOTE
tem 2/ JAM Code Display Setting” of the Service Mode.
(1) Tray3 (typical)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A1V4T2E011DA
(2) System 2/ JAM Code Display Setting
A1UDT2E003DA
16
4.5 Paper level display

• The paper level is indicated by the LED on the right side of each paper feed tray and by
PC-409
the screen of the control panel.
Other statuses
Paper feed tray
condition
conditions)
*: The LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode/System 1/
Machine State LED Setting/Paper Remainder.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4] [5] A1V4T2E007DA
17
4.6 Periodically replaced parts

PC-409
“LCT Parts” counter must be reset to zero using “Counter/ Life” of the Service Mode.
• The number of times LCT Parts has been subjected to paper feed operations can be
checked with the “LCT Parts” counter of the Service Mode.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1] [2]
A1V4T2E013DA
[1] Paper feed roller/Pick-up roller [2] Service Mode/Counter reset screen
Separation roller
18
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
JS-505
JS-505
OUTLINE
2. PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Exit to the lower tray ............................................................................................. 3
OUTLINE
2.2 Exit to the sub tray ................................................................................................ 3
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 6
CONFIGURATION/
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 7
OPERATION
5.1 Transport/exit section............................................................................................ 7
5.1.1 Paper transport ............................................................................................. 7
5.1.2 Transport path switching ............................................................................... 8
5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism............................................................. 12
5.1.4 Lower tray exit roller pressure/retraction ..................................................... 13
5.2 Paper shift section .............................................................................................. 15
5.2.1 Paper shift mechanism................................................................................ 15
5.2.2 Shift operation overview.............................................................................. 16
i
JS-505
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
JS-505
A. Type
Type Built-in type 2-bin stacker

Installation Installed in main body
Document align-
Center
ment
OUTLINE
B. Functions
Modes Sort, group, sort offset, group offset
C. Paper
Exit tray Size Type Capacity

Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2)
150 sheets
(16 to 24 lb)
Thick paper 1
(91 to 150 g/m2)
(24.25 to 40 lb)
A6S, A5S/A5, B6S, B5S/B5, Thick paper 2

A4S/A4, B4, A3, A3 Wide, Post (151 to 209 g/m2)
card S (40.25 to 55.5 lb)
5-1/2 X 8-1/2S/5-1/2 X 8-1/2, Thick paper 3
8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, (210 to 256 g/m2) 20 sheets
Lower tray
8-1/2 X 14, 11 X 17, 12-1/4 X 18 Special (55.75 to 68 lb)
Max.: 311.1 mm X 1200 mm paper Thick paper 4
12.25 inch X 47.25 inch (257 to 271 g/m2)
Min.: 90 mm X 139.7 mm (68.25 to 72 lb)
3.5 inch X 5.5 inch
OHP film
Post card
Label
Envelope 10 sheets
Long size paper 1 sheet
A5S, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3
8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, 8-1/2 X
14, 11 X 17
Sub tray Max.: 297 mm X 431.8 mm 50 sheets
(16 to 24 lb)
11.75 inch X 17 inch
Min.: 148 mm X 210 mm
5.75 inch X 8.25 inch
1
D. Offset function
Exit tray Lower tray

JS-505
Shift amount 30 mm
Types of paper to
Plain paper, Thick paper 1/2/3/4
be used
B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3
Size
8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, 8-1/2 X 14, 11 X 17
E. Machine specifications
DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)

OUTLINE
Power require-
ments DC5 V ± 5 %
Max. power con-
40 W or less
sumption
423 mm (W) X 477 mm (D) X 129.5 mm (H)
16.75 inch (W) X 18.75 inch (D) X 5 inch (H)
Dimensions
543 mm (W) X 477 mm (D) X 129.5 mm (H) *1
21.5 inch (W) X 18.75 inch (D) X 5 inch (H) *1
Weight 5.0 kg (11 lb)
*1: Size when the paper exit tray is pulled out
F. Operating environment
NOTE
2
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 2. PAPER PATH
2. PAPER PATH
2.1 Exit to the lower tray
JS-505
OUTLINE
A083T1C501AA
2.2 Exit to the sub tray
A083T1C502AA
3
JS-505
OUTLINE
Blank Page
4
3. CONFIGURATION
JS-505
CONFIGURATION/
A083T2C519AA
OPERATION
A083T1C503AA
Upper tray
Transport path switching mechanism
Lower tray Paper shift mechanism
A083T2C501AA
5
4. DRIVE
JS-505
JS control board (JSCB)

Transport motor (M1)
Retraction motor (M3)
Upper tray exit roller
Lower tray exit roller
Shift motor (M2)

CONFIGURATION/
A083T2C507AA
OPERATION
6
5. OPERATION
5.1 Transport/exit section
JS-505
5.1.1 Paper transport
• Drive from the transport motor causes the corresponding exit roller to rotate, thereby
transporting the paper into the main or upper tray.
• The transport motor is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper has acti-
vated the paper exit sensor of the copier.
• Drive of the transport motor rotates the exit roller, so that paper is transported into the
corresponding tray.
Transport motor (M1)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A083T2C503AA
7
5.1.2 Transport path switching

• The paper transport path is adequately switched to ensure that the paper is transported
properly into the main or upper tray as necessary.
JS-505
• The retraction motor is energized to operate the paper path switching guide, so that the
paper is directed into the correct tray.

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper path switching guide Lower tray exit roller

A083T2C508AA
A. Overview
• Paper path switching is done by the paper path switching guide. The paper path switch-
ing guide is swung up or down at the following timings.
Guide moving direction Operation

Guide swung up
Lower tray selected for exit port, 2-sided print, sort selected
(to feed paper into lower tray)
Guide swung down
Upper tray selected for exit port
(to feed paper into upper tray)
Paper path switching guide
Guide swung up Guide swung down

(to feed paper into lower tray) (to feed paper into upper tray)
A083T2C515AA
8
B. Operation
• The retraction motor is used to swing up or down the paper path switching guide. The
retraction motor, when energized, swings the paper path switching guide up or down.
JS-505
• The retraction home sensor detects the position of the paper path switching guide, either
in the raised or lowered position.
The paper path switching guide is detected at its raised or lowered position when the
sensor is blocked or unblocked by a cam.
Guide moving direction Retraction home sensor

Guide swung up (to feed paper into lower tray) Blocked
Guide swung down (to feed paper into upper tray) Unblocked
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Retraction home sensor (PS4)
Cam
A083T2C516AA
(1) Predrive
• The following operations are performed before the paper path switching operation when
the copier is turned ON or released from the sleep mode, or a malfunction is reset.
Part Operation
The retraction motor is energized to swing up the paper path switching
Retraction motor
guide into its raised position (to feed paper into the lower tray).
The retraction motor is deenergized a predetermined period of time
Retraction home sensor
after the sensor has been blocked.
9
(2) Operation from the lowered position (exit to lower tray) to the raised position
(exit to upper tray)
1. The predrive sequence is run (only when the copier is turned or released from the
JS-505
sleep mode, or a malfunction is reset).

2. The exit position of the tray is determined according to whether the retraction home
sensor is blocked or unblocked.
3. If the retraction home sensor is blocked, it is determined that the paper path switch-
ing guide is in its raised position (to feed paper into the lower tray). If the sensor is
unblocked, it is then determined that the paper path switching guide is in its low-
ered position (to feed paper into the upper tray).
4. If the paper path switching guide is in its raised position (to feed paper into the
lower tray), the retraction motor is energized. After the retraction home sensor is
thereafter unblocked, the retraction motor is deenergized.
Retraction motor Paper path switching guide

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Before switching After switching
A083T2C509AA
Retraction motor
Paper path switching guide Retraction home sensor

A083T2C517AA
Cam
10
(3) Paper exit into the upper tray

1. The predrive sequence is run (only when the copier is turned or released from the
sleep mode, or a malfunction is reset).
JS-505
2. The exit position of the tray is determined according to whether the retraction home
sensor is blocked or unblocked.
3. If the retraction home sensor is blocked, it is determined that the paper path switch-
ing guide is in its raised position (to feed paper into the lower tray). If the sensor is
unblocked, it is then determined that the paper path switching guide is in its low-
ered position (to feed paper into the upper tray).
4. If the paper path switching guide is in its lowered position (to feed paper into the
upper tray), the retraction motor is energized. After the retraction home sensor is
thereafter blocked, the retraction motor is deenergized.
Retraction motor Paper path switching guide
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Before switching After switching
A083T2C510AA
Retraction motor
Paper path switching

guide
Retraction home sensor
Cam A083T2C518AA
11
5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism

• Each tray is mounted with a tray paper full detect board that detects a full-of-paper condi-
tion of the tray.
JS-505
• The tray paper full detect board consists of an LED and a PR (photoreceiver). When the
paper stack blocks the LED light for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that
the tray is in the full-of-paper condition. This is relayed to a corresponding message on
the control panel.
Upper tray paper full detect board/PR (T2FDTB/PR)
Upper tray paper full detect board/LED (T2FDTB/LED)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR)

Lower tray paper full detect board/LED (T1FDTB/LED)
A083T2C514AA
12
5.1.4 Lower tray exit roller pressure/retraction

• The lower tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows
paper to be temporarily fed into the lower tray when a 2-sided print cycle is commanded.
JS-505
• When a pressure/retraction command is received, the roller pressure/retraction clutch is
energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn, which causes the lifting plate to
swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and released.
Roller pressure/retraction clutch
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Pressure/retraction home
sensor
Lifting cam
Lifting plate A083T2C511AA
A. Exit roller pressure/retraction overview

• The exit roller is normally in its pressed condition. It is released during a 2-sided print
cycle.
• When the copier is turned or released from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close, the
roller pressure/retraction clutch is energized to bring the exit roller into its pressed condi-
tion, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
Roller pressure/release condition

Normal printing Pressed
2-sided printing
The copier is turned or released from the sleep mode, or a Pressed → released → pressed
cover open/close
13
B. Exit roller pressure/retraction operation

• When the roller pressure/retraction clutch is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half
turn. The lifting plate is then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/retraction opera-
JS-505
tion.
• Whether the pressure/retraction home sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the
condition of the exit roller, either pressed or released.
• When the pressure/retraction home sensor is blocked and unblocked, the roller pressure/
retraction clutch is deenergized to stop the operation.
Pressure/retraction home sensor Lifting plate position

Pressed Blocked Raised
Released Unblocked Lowered

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Lifting plate
Lifting cam
Pressed condition Released condition
A083T2C512AA
14
5.2 Paper shift section

5.2.1 Paper shift mechanism
JS-505
• The exit roller is shifted its position during paper exit so that print jobs can be offset, one
job from another.
• To offset print jobs, the shift section is moved.
• The shift section is moved by drive supplied from the shift motor. The motion is controlled
by the shift home sensor that is blocked or unblocked.
• The shift operation is executed when the sort function is used on the control panel.
Shift section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Shift home sensor (PS6) Shift motor (M2)
A083T2C513AA
15
5.2.2 Shift operation overview

• At a predetermined timing during paper exit into the lower tray, the shift motor is ener-
gized to slide the shift section in a direction perpendicular to the feeding direction.
JS-505
• Receiving a shift operation command, the shift motor is energized, causing the shift sec-
tion to slide.
• The position of the shift section is controlled using the shift home sensor. The position is
detected as the shift home sensor is blocked or unblocked.
• The shift home sensor is normally blocked.
• When the sort function is used on the control panel, the shift motor is energized and the
shift section is made to slide until the shift home sensor is unblocked.
A predetermined period of time after the shift section has been moved (for sorting), the
shift motor is energized to slide the shift section until the shift home sensor is blocked.
Paper Shift section

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Normal position Shift position

A083T2C520AA
Shift home sensor
16
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
FS-527
FS-527
OUTLINE
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Tray1 ..................................................................................................................... 4
OUTLINE
2.2 Tray2 ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Stapling................................................................................................................. 6
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 7
CONFIGURATION/
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION............................................................... 8
OPERATION
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8
4.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism ...................................................................... 9
4.2.1 Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 9
4.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism ........................................... 10
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................... 11
5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 12
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 13
5.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate ................................................................. 13
5.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate............................................................................ 14
5.3.3 Conveyance operation ................................................................................ 15
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 18
6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
6.2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 19
6.2.1 Tray lift......................................................................................................... 19
6.2.2 Exit to tray1 ................................................................................................. 20
6.2.3 Exit to tray2 ................................................................................................. 21
6.2.4 Tray2 shift control ........................................................................................ 23
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................ 25
7.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 25
7.2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 26
7.2.1 Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 26
7.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism ................................................ 27
i
8. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 28
8.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 28
FS-527
8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 29
8.2.1 Stapler movement....................................................................................... 29
8.2.2 Stapler control............................................................................................. 30
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
ii
OUTLINE
FS-527
A. Type
Name Multi staple finisher

Type Freestanding
Document
Center
alignment
Consumables Staples
OUTLINE
B. Functions
Modes Sort, group, offset, group offset, sort staple
C. Paper type
(1) Non sort/sort/group
Type Size Weight Max. capacity

Exit
200 sheets
A6S, A5S/A5, B5S/B5, tray1
B6S, A4S/A4, B4, A3, A4S, 8 /2 x 11S
1 3000
Plain paper A3Wide or less sheets
60 to 90 g/m2
Recycled 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S/5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
16 to 24 lb Exit B4, 8 1/2 x 14 1500
paper 8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, tray2 or greater sheets
12 1/4 x 18 A5S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S 500
or less sheets
Tray1 (Sub tray)
Envelope —
Max.
OHP 311.15 mm x 1200 mm —
transparencies 12.25 x 47.24 inch
Label Min. —
90 mm x 139.7 mm
Letterhead —
3.54 x 5.5 inch
91 to 150 g/m2
Thick paper 1 20 sheets
Tray2 (Main tray) 24.25 to 40 lb
Max.
151 to 209 g/m 2
Thick paper 2 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
40.25 to 55.5 lb
12.25 x 18 inch
Min. 210 to 256 g/m2
Thick paper 3
100 mm x 139.7 mm 55.75 to 68 lb
3.94 x 5.5 inch 257 to 271 g/m2
Thick paper 4
68.25 to 72 lb
Long size 210 mm to 297 mm x 127 to 160 g/m2
—
paper * 457.2 mm to 1200 mm 33.75 to 42.5 lb
*: Long size paper is available only for non-sort mode.
1
(2) Sort offset/group offset
Type Size Weight Max. capacity

FS-527
A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A4S, 8 1/2 x 11S 3000

A3, A3Wide or less sheets *
Plain paper 8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11,
60 to 90 g/m2 Exit B4, 8 1/2 x 14 1500
Recycled 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 1/4 x 18
16 to 24 lb tray2 or greater sheets
paper Max.
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm 500
A5
12.25 x 18 inch sheets
Min.
91 to 271 g/m2
Thick paper 182 mm x 148.5 mm —
OUTLINE
24.25 to 72 lb
7.17 x 5.85 inch
*: 2000 sheets when SD-509 is mounted
(3) Sort staple
Max. capacity Max.

No. of
No. of sheets A4S, B4,
Type Size Weight sheets
to be stapled 8-1/2 X 11S 8-1/2 X 14 to be
or less or greater stapled
2 to 9
100 copies 50 copies
sheets
10 to 20
A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, 50 copies 50 copies
sheets
Plain paper B4, A3
8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11, 60 to 90 g/m 2
Exit 21 to 30 50
Recycled 30 copies 30 copies
8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17 16 to 24 lb tray2 sheets sheets
paper
Max. 31 to 40
25 copies 25 copies
297 mm x 431.8 mm sheets
11.75 x 17 inch 41 to 50
Min. 20 copies 20 copies
sheets
182 mm x 148.5 mm
Thick 7.25 x 5.75 inch 30
—
paper 1 91 to 209 g/m2 sheets
Thick 24.25 to 55.5 lb 15
—
paper 2 sheets
2
D. Stapling
Staple filling mode Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
FS-527
Back/Front of the corner A4, A3
(45 degree) 8 1/2 x 11, 11 x 17
Back/Front of the corner
B5, B4
(35 degree)
Stapling position
Back/Front of the corner A4S, B5S, A5
(Parallel) 8 1/2 x 11S, 8 1/2 x 14
A4S/A4, A3, B5S/B5, B4, A5
Side: Parallel 2 point
8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17
OUTLINE
Manual staple None
E. Machine specifications
Power
requirements
Max. power
56 W or less
consumption
528 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,025 (H) mm
20.79 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 40.35 (H) inch
Dimensions
658 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,087 (H) mm *
25.91 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 42.8 (H) inch *
Weight 42 kg (92.59 lb)
*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out
F. Operating environment
3
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
2. PAPER FEED PATH

2.1 Tray1
FS-527
Tray1
OUTLINE
Paper path from the horizontal

conveyance unit
Tray1 exit roller

Tray1 path switching gate
A0HRT1C001DB
4
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.2 Tray2
FS-527
Bypass route Upper lower path switching gate
OUTLINE
Tray2
conveyance unit
A0HRT1C002DB
5
2.3 Stapling
FS-527
Bypass route Upper lower path switching gate

OUTLINE
Tray2

conveyance unit
Tray2 exit roller
Alignment section
Stapler
A0HRT1C003DB
6
3. CONFIGURATION
FS-527
• The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal conveyance section,
conveyance section, alignment section, tray1, tray2, and stapler section.
Tray1 Horizontal conveyance

Alignment section Conveyance section section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2
Stapler section
A0HRT2C002DB
7
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

4.1 Configuration
FS-527
• The horizontal conveyance section is composed of the duplex path switching sensor,
paper passage sensor/1, horizontal conveyance cover sensor, paper passage sensor/2,
paper passage motor/1, and duplex path switching motor.
Duplex path switching motor (M2) Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)
Paper passage Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)

motor/1 (M1)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)

Horizontal conveyance cover
sensor (PS5)
A0HRT2C001DA
8
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism

4.2.1 Paper conveyance
FS-527
• The horizontal conveyance section conveys paper fed out from the main body to the fin-
isher.
• The paper passage motor/1 provides drive for the conveyance rollers.
• On the finisher side, drive from the paper passage motor/1 conveys the paper into the
finisher.
Horizontal conveyance section
Finisher side Main body side
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
Conveyance roller
A0HRT2C003DA
9
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
4.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism

• The horizontal conveyance section is provided with a paper path switching mechanism
FS-527
for conveying paper fed from the fusing section onto the duplex section or tray 3 (when
another option of JS-603 is mounted).
• The paper path is changed by the duplex path switching motor and the path switching
guide.
Duplex path switching

sensor (PS3)
Path switching guide

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Duplex path switching

motor (M2)
A0HRT2C024DA
A. Operation
• The path switching guide swings up or down when the duplex path switching motor is
energized.
• The duplex path switching sensor detects the position of the path switching guide, either
the swung-up or swung-down position. The sensor is blocked or unblocked by the cam to
detect the swung-down or swung-up position of the path switching guide as detailed
below.
Path switching guide position Duplex path switching sensor

Swung-up position (paper to finisher) Unblocking
Swung-down position (paper to duplex section) Blocking
10
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
5.1 Configuration
FS-527
Tray1 exit roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Registration
roller
Tray2 exit roller Switchback roller
Conveyance motor (M4)

Exit motor (M5)
A0HRT2C025DA
11
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
5.2 Drive
FS-527
Tray1 exit roller Exit motor (M5)

Conveyance motor (M4)
Tray2 exit roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Conveyance
roller 2
Paper passage roller
Exit driven roller Conveyance roller 1
A0HRT2C004DB
12
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate
FS-527
• The upper lower path switching gate switches paper to different routes that go to individ-
ual trays and SD-509.
• The paper exit command from the main body moves the upper lower path switching gate
up or down as necessary.
A. Upper lower path switching gate operation

• The upper lower path switching motor drives the route change gate.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Upper lower path
switching gate
Upper lower path switching gate
Upper lower path switching motor (M6)

A0HRT2C005DB
13
5.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate

• The tray1 path switching gate changes the paper conveyance path between one toward
FS-527
the tray1 and one toward the bypass route.
A. Tray1 path switching gate operation

• The tray1 path switching gate is operated by the tray1 path switching motor.
• When the tray1 path switching motor is energized, the tray1 path switching gate swings
up or down.
• The tray1 path switching home sensor detects the position of the tray1 path switching
gate, either the swung-up or swung-down position.

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1 path switching

motor (M8)
A0HRT2C006DB
Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
14
5.3.3 Conveyance operation

A. Tray1 conveyance
FS-527
• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed via the registra-
tion roller and guided into the tray1 by the upper lower path switching gate and tray1 path
switching gate. It is then fed out into the tray1 by the tray1 exit roller.
Upper lower path switching gate

Tray1
Registration roller
Tray1 exit roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0HRT2C008DB
B. Tray2 conveyance
• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed onto the align-
ment section by way of the registration roller, paper passage roller, switchback roller, and
lower path roller.
Paper passage roller
Tray2 Registration roller
Lower path roller
Switchback roller
A0HRT2C007DB
15
C. Bypass route
• The bypass route is provided to eliminate any time loss during stapling operation relative
to the subsequent sheet of paper and to achieve high productivity.
FS-527
The following describe how two copy sets/stacks are produced as an output, each con-
sisting of two sheets of paper stapled together.
(1) For the 1st copy

• The bypass route is not used for the paper path for the first copy set/stack.
(2) For the 2nd copy
• The first sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack passes through the path to tray2,
but is fed and temporarily brought into a standby state on the conveyance path to the SD-
509 by the switchback roller.
• The second sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack is then conveyed and fed into
the bypass route.
• At the same time that the first copy set/stack is fed out, the first and second sheets of the
second copy set/stack are conveyed onto the alignment section.
Bypass route
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Conveyance path to the SD-509
Tray2
Switchback roller
SD-509
A0HRT2C009DB
16
D. Conveyance to SD-509
• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is further conveyed onto the
path toward tray2 and, when the trailing edge of the paper moves past the lower path
FS-527
sensor, the switchback roller is brought to a temporary stop.
• The switchback roller is thereafter turned backward, so that the paper is conveyed into
the SD-509.
Lower path sensor (PS9)
Switchback roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
SD-509
A0HRT2C010DB
17
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION

6.1 Drive
FS-527
Tray2
Elevate motor (M15)
Lift belt
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0HRT2C011DB
18
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Tray lift
FS-527
A. Tray lift operation
• The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the elevate motor drives the
lift belt.
• The tray2 moves up or down depending on the direction in which the lift belt is driven.
Tray2
Elevate motor (M15)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2 upper position
switch (SW2)
Lift belt
Tray2 lower position
switch (SW3)
Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)
Tray2 lower position sensor (PS21)
A0HRT2C012DB
B. Paper detection
• The tray2 upper position sensor keeps the specified distance between the upper surface
of the paper exited to the tray2 and the paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment
of the exited paper.
• The tray2 upper position sensor and tray2 lower position sensor detect a full-of-paper
condition of the tray2.
• When both of these sensors are activated, a corresponding message appears on the
control panel.
• The tray2 lower position switch detects the lower limit of the tray.
19
6.2.2 Exit to tray1

• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is fed out into the tray1 by
FS-527
the tray1 exit roller by way of the registration roller and paper passage roller.
• The upper lower path switching gate and tray1 path switching gate are also operated to
convey the paper into the tray1.
• The paper passage motor/2 provides drive for the tray1 exit roller.
Tray1
Tray1 exit roller
Tray1 path Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
switching gate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Upper lower path

switching gate
A0HRT2C015DB
20
6.2.3 Exit to tray2

• The exit motor is energized to convey paper onto tray2.
FS-527
• To collect sheets of paper in the alignment section during stapling, the exit roll is tempo-
rarily retracted.
• When the stapling operation is completed, the exit roll is pressed, so that the paper is fed
out into tray2.
• The exit roller retraction motor provides drive for retraction of the exit roll.
A. Normal paper exit operation

• When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2
exit roller, the exit motor is energized and the paper is conveyed onto tray2.
Exit motor (M5)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2 exit roller
A0HRT2C013DB
B. Paper exit operation during stapling

• When the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit sensor of the main body, the
exit roller retraction motor is energized to retract the exit roll.
• After the paper is processed, the exit roller retraction motor is energized to press the exit
roll and the paper is fed out by drive from the exit motor.
21
FS-527
Exit roller retraction motor (M9)
Exit roll
Tray2 exit roller

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit motor (M5)

A0HRT2C014DB
Before pressure After pressure
A0HRT2C026DA
22
6.2.4 Tray2 shift control

• The tray2 is moved to the front or rear in order to offset one copy set/stack with respect to
FS-527
another in the sort or group mode.
• The tray2 shift motor provides drive for the front-to-rear shift motion of the tray2.
Tray2 shift motor (M16)

Tray2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0HRT2C016DB
23
A. Tray1 shift operation

• When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2
exit roller in the sort/group mode, the tray2 shift motor is energized to perform the shift
FS-527
operation.
• When the tray2 shift motor is energized, the shift frame is moved to the right or left via a
gear train, which results in tray2 operatively connected to the shift frame being moved to
the right or left.
• If a command for the next paper is received, the tray2 shift motor is energized again to
perform the shift operation.
• The shift position of the tray2 is controlled by the tray2 shift home sensor. The sensor is
activated when the tray2 is at its home position (ordinary position).
• The amount of shift operation is 30 mm.
30 mm Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)

Tray2 shift motor (M16)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2
Shift frame
A0HRT2C019DB
24
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
7.1 Drive
FS-527
Alignment plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
Alignment plate motor (M13)

A0HRT2C017DB
25
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Alignment plate
FS-527
• The alignment plates align sheets of paper in the crosswise direction inside the finisher.
• The alignment plate motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to open/close the
alignment plates to perform the alignment of the paper.
• The alignment plate motor rotates to open/close the alignment plates via the alignment
plate belts.
• The alignment plate home sensor detects the home position of the alignment plates.
Alignment plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate motor Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)

(M13)
A0HRT2C018DB
26
7.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism

• The paper fed out from the main body falls in the alignment section by its own weight.
FS-527
• The accommodation paddle motor operates the accommodation paddle to convey paper
reliably onto the alignment section.
Accommodation
paddle
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Accommodation paddle
motor (M12)
Rewind paddle
A0HRT2C020DB
27
8. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
8. STAPLER
8.1 Drive
FS-527
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0HRT2C027DA
Stapler unit
Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
Stapler movement motor (M11)

Belt
A0HRT2C021DB
28
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 8. STAPLER
8.2 Operation
8.2.1 Stapler movement
FS-527
A. Stapler movement operation
• The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
• Rotation of the stapler movement motor drives the belt through the pulley, which moves
the stapler mounted on the belt.
• The stapler home sensor/1 becomes the stapler’s home position. In the two-point sta-
pling mode, the stapler is stopped at a position a given distance relative to the stapler
home sensor/2.
• In the one-corner stapling mode using A4 or A3 paper, the stapler stops at the stapler
home sensor/1 to staple sheets. For any other paper size, the stapler stops a position a
predetermined distance away relative to the stapler home sensor/1 to staple sheets.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Belt Stapler
A0HRT2C028DA
29
8.2.2 Stapler control

• The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.
FS-527
A. Stapling operation
• In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper.
Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.
Stapler (clincher side)
Paper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Stapler motor (M18)

Stapler (stapler side)
A0HRT2C023DB
30
B. Staple control
(1) Stapling
• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the stapler motor per-
FS-527
forms the stapling operation.
• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor in the stapler detects
the home position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection

• The main body determines that staples have been jammed, if the stapler home sensor is
not activated within a predetermined period of time after it has been deactivated during a
stapling operation. The stapler motor is then rotated backward to bring the stapler back
to its home position.
(3) Staple detection and cartridge detection

• When the staples run out, or if there is no cartridge loaded in position, the staple empty
switch turns ON and the main body displays a corresponding staple empty message on
the control panel.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
31
FS-527
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
32
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
PK-517
PK-517
OUTLINE
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2
3. PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 3
OUTLINE
4. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5
5.1 Skew correction mechanism ................................................................................. 5
CONFIGURATION/
5.2 Punch mechanism ................................................................................................ 6
OPERATION
5.3 Punch status detection ......................................................................................... 7
5.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism ........................................................... 8
i
PK-517
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
PK-517
A. Type
Name Punch kit

Type FS-integrated type punching operation device
B. Functions
OUTLINE
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes 2-3 holes / 4 holes / Sweden 4 holes
2 holes / φ 8.0 mm / 70 mm pitch - 3 holes / φ 8.0 mm / 108 mm pitch
Hole diameter/pitch 4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
Sweden 4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode Punch mode
Applicable post processing
Sort, group, staple
mode
C. Paper type
2 hole punch setting:

11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11/8-1/2 x 11S

11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 11
Size
A3, B4, A4, B5
Sweden 4 hole punch setting:

A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5
Plain paper, bond paper, thick paper 1/2/3
Supported paper
(Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight 60 to 256 g/m2
Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,
Punch prohibited paper and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch kit
or the punch blade
D. Machine specifications
58 mm (W) x 470 mm (D) x 135 mm (H)

Dimensions
E. Operating environment
NOTE
1
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION
PK-517
Punch section
OUTLINE
Punch scraps box section
A10ET1C001DB
2
3. PAPER PATH
PK-517
Punch kit
OUTLINE
Paper path from
the main body
Punch scraps box
A10ET1C002DB
3
PK-517
OUTLINE
Blank Page
4
4. CONFIGURATION
PK-517
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10ET2C001DA
5. OPERATION
5.1 Skew correction mechanism
• For punch operation, a loop is formed in the paper at the conveyance roller to correct
skew.
• The paper passage sensor/1 detects the leading edge of the paper and the conveyance
roller forms a loop in the paper.
• The paper passage motor/1 is then energized after a given period of time after the paper
passage sensor/1 is activated by the leading edge of the paper, this causes the convey-
ance roller to start turning.
Conveyance roller
Paper passage sensor/1

(PS1)
4512T2C002DA
5
5.2 Punch mechanism

• The paper passage sensor/1 will detect the trailing edge of the paper and stop feeding
PK-517
the paper after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

• The drive cam will be rotated by the punch motor/1(2) to move the slide cam back and
forth. The slide cam will move the puncher down to make the punch hole at the back
edge of the paper. (The punch hole will be made sheet by sheet.)
Slide cam
Puncher
Punch motor/1 (M100)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper passage
sensor/1 (PS1)
Paper feed direction
A10ET2C002DA
Puncher
Slide cam

A10ET2C004DA
6
5.3 Punch status detection

• The punch status is detected by the punch cam position sensor, punch home sensor/1,
PK-517
and the punch pulse sensor/1.
Punch cam position sensor (PS200)
Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)

Punch home sensor/2 (PS101)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300)
Punch pulse sensor/2 (PS301) A10ET2C003DA
7
5.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism

• The punch trash box is provided with the punch hole full sensor. When a punch waste is
PK-517
detected, the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel.

• The punch hole full sensor is a reflector type sensor that detects height of the punch
trash.
• Punch hole full sensor also detects whether or not the punch trash box is mounted.
“Punch dust full” message will be displayed on the control panel when the punch trash
box is not mounted.
Punch hole full sensor (PS30)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10ET2C005DA
8
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
SD-509
SD-509
OUTLINE
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
OUTLINE
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 4
4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4
4.2 Operation .............................................................................................................. 5
CONFIGURATION/
4.2.1 Alignment ...................................................................................................... 5
OPERATION
4.2.2 Stopper ......................................................................................................... 7
5. STAPLER ................................................................................................................ 9
5.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 9
5.2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 10
5.2.1 Stapling ....................................................................................................... 10
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING .......................................................................... 11
6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 12
6.2.1 Folding plate................................................................................................ 12
6.2.2 Folding conveyance .................................................................................... 13
7. EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 15
7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 15
7.2 Operation ............................................................................................................ 16
7.2.1 Exit .............................................................................................................. 16
i
SD-509
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
SD-509
A. Type
Name Saddle sticher SD-509

Type Built into the finisher
Installation Screwed to the finisher
Stapling function Center parallel two points
OUTLINE
B. Paper
(1) Saddle stitching
Type Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2

A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide, 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11S
Size Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
15 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
Max. saddle stitching capacity 14 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
+ 1 sheet (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 , 16 to 55.5 lb)
(2) Folding
Type Plain paper

A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide, 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11S
Size Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
239 mm (W) x 579 mm (D) x 534 mm (H)

Dimensions
Weight 24 kg (52.91 lb)
E. Consumables
• Staples 5000 (SK-602: Staple kit)
NOTE
1
2. PAPER FEED PATH

SD-509
OUTLINE
A10DT1C001DB
2
3. CONFIGURATION
SD-509
Alignment section
Stapler
Exit section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10DT2C001DA
3
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
4.1 Drive
SD-509
Alignment plate/R Alignment plate/F
Center staple alignment Center staple alignment

motor/R (M23) motor/F (M24)
Leading edge stopper motor (M20) Leading edge stopper

CONFIGURATION/
Leading edge
stopper
OPERATION
A10DT2C002DB
4
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Alignment
SD-509
• In the folding/saddle stitching mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R aligns
paper.
• The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the
alignment plates, thereby aligning paper in the main scanning direction.
• The leading edge stopper motor is rotated to raise the leading edge stopper up to a posi-
tion of the paper to be stored, thereby aligning paper in the sub-scanning direction.
Paddle
Upper paddle motor (M21) Alignment plate/F
Center staple alignment

home sensor/F (PS42)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate/R
Center staple alignment Center staple alignment

home sensor/R (PS41) motor/F (M24)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)

Leading edge stopper
Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
A10DT2C003DB
A. Alignment operation
• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via
the alignment belts.
• The center staple alignment home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the align-
ment plates.
• The leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper in the vertical
direction via the belt.
5
B. Alignment control
• When the first sheet of paper undergoes a switchback operation, the center staple align-
ment motor/F and /R start rotating to bring the alignment plates closer to each other and
SD-509
then bring them to a stop at the standby positions at which they are apart from each at a
distance slightly wider than the paper width.
• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating
in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a
specified period of time since the saddle path sensor detects the trailing edge of the
paper.
• The paper alignment operation in the main scanning direction is performed each time a
sheet of paper is fed in.
C. Paddle control
• After the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the saddle path sensor has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the upper paddle motor is rotated to align the
paper in the sub-scanning direction.
• The paddles are rotated each time a sheet of paper is fed in.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
6
4.2.2 Stopper
• At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers
SD-509
conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.
• The leading edge grip holds the paper when moving it to a specified position, or when
stapling or folding it.
A. Stopper operation
• The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accor-
dance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home
position.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)
Leading edge stopper motor (M20)

Leading edge grip
Leading edge grip
Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)
A10DT2C004DA
7
B. Stopper control
(1) Folding mode
• After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON
SD-509
and the sheets of paper are held in place.

• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.
(2) Saddle stitching mode

• After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON
and the sheets of paper are held in place.
• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.
• After stapling operation was completed, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R
opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move
the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paper to the folding position.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
8
5. STAPLER
5.1 Drive
SD-509
Staple motor
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Drive gear
A10DT2C005DA
9
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Stapling
SD-509
• The stapling operation is performed by the staple motor.
A. Stapling operation
• In the stapling operation, the staple motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press sec-
tion to the clincher by the drive gear to hold the paper and punch out the staple. Then,
the staple is bent in the clincher.
Clincher Drive gear Staple motor

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Stapler
Staple
A10DT2C006DA
B. Staple control
(1) Stapling
• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor per-
forms the stapling operation.
• The stapling operation is completed when the sensor in the stapler detects the home
position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection

• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the
staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home position if
the sensor in the stapler does not turn ON after a specified period of time since it turn
OFF.
10
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
6.1 Drive
SD-509
Folding plate
Folding roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Center fold roller
motor (M25)
Center fold plate

motor (M26)
A10DT2C007DB
11
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Folding plate
SD-509
• The center fold plate motor drives the folding plate.
A. Folding plate operation

• The center fold plate motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the
paper to the nip section with the folding plate.
• The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.
• The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.
Fold plate
Crank shaft
Folding roller
Center fold plate

CONFIGURATION/
home sensor (PS47)

OPERATION
Paper
A11RT2C014DA
B. Folding plate control

• The center fold plate motor turns ON and sticks out the folding plate to the paper after a
specified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.
• The center fold plate motor stops when the folding plate reciprocates and the center fold
plate home sensor turns ON.
12
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
6.2.2 Folding conveyance

• The center fold roller motor drives the folding roller.
SD-509
Folding roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Center fold roller
motor (M25)
A10DT2C009DA
13
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
A. Folding conveyance control

• The center fold plate motor turns ON after the leading edge stopper stops at the folding
position.
SD-509
• When the center fold plate motor turns ON the center fold plate home sensor, the center
fold roller motor turns ON and folds the paper.
• The center fold roller motor stops after a specified period of time since the paper detec-
tion sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10DT2C010DA
B. Folding roller control

• Different folding roller controls are performed depending on the number of sheets of
paper and the size of the paper.
(1) The paper width is 215.9 mm or more and the number of sheets of paper is less
than six
• When the center fold plate home sensor is deactivated after the center fold plate motor
has been energized, the center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low
speed.
• The folding roller is made to start rotating at high speed after the lapse of a predeter-
mined period of time after it has started rotating.
• When the paper detection sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the lead-
ing edge stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment
position defined according to the paper size.
(2) Other than above

• The center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low speed a predetermined
period of time before the paper stack reaches the center fold position.
• The center fold plate motor is energized and, after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the center fold plate home sensor has been deactivated, the folding roller is
made to start rotating at high speed.
• When the paper detection sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the lead-
ing edge stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment
position defined according to the paper size.
14
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010 7. EXIT SECTION
7. EXIT SECTION
7.1 Configuration
SD-509
Booklet tray near full Booklet tray full
sensor (PS48) sensor (PS50)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10DT2C008DA
15
7. EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2010
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Exit
SD-509
• The paper fed out by the center fold roller motor is stacked in the tray by its own weight.
A. Full-of-paper detection
• The capacity of the tray varies depending on the number of sheets of paper in the paper
sets/stacks fed into the tray and detection of a full-of-paper condition cannot be made
based on the number of sheets of paper stacked in the tray.
The main body therefore counts the number of sheets of paper stacked and detects a
full-of-paper condition when a predetermined number of sheets of paper is reached.
If the booklet tray full sensor remains activated for a predetermined period of time, the
main body determines that paper can no longer be fed into the tray and that there is a
full-of-paper condition in the tray.
B. Full-of-paper detection conditions

• The booklet tray full sensor is activated.
• The booklet tray near full sensor is activated when the power switch is turned ON.
CONFIGURATION/
• The number of sets/stacks stacked in the tray reaches a predetermined value during
OPERATION
copying.
• A set/stack having a paper length different from that fed out earlier is fed out.
The main body does not determine that there is a full-of-paper condition in the tray under
any condition other than above.
16
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
JS-603
JS-603
OUTLINE
2. PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 2
OUTLINE
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5
5.1 Conveyance/exit section ....................................................................................... 5
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.1.2 Conveyance path switching........................................................................... 5
5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism............................................................... 6
5.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction ........................................................................ 7
i
JS-603
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
JS-603
A. Type
Type Fixed to the finisher

Document align-
Center
ment
B. Functions
OUTLINE
Modes Sort, group
C. Paper
Size Type Capacity

100 sheets
(16 to 24 lb)
Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2)
(24.25 to 40 lb)
A5S, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3, A3 Wide
5-1/2 X 8-1/2S, 8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, 8-1/2 X 14,
(40.25 to 55.5 lb)
11 X 17, 12-1/4 X 18
Max.: 311.15 mm X 457.2 mm Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2)
12.25 inch X 18 inch Special (55.75 to 68 lb) 10 sheets
Min.: 139.7 mm X 182 mm paper
5.5 inch X 7.17 inch (68.25 to 72 lb)
OHP film
Label
Envelope
D. Machine specifications
Power require- DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)

ments DC5 V ± 5 %
165 mm (W) X 389 mm (D) X 63 mm (H)
Dimensions
6.5 inch (W) X 15.31 inch (D) X 2.48 inch (H)
E. Operating environment
NOTE
1
2. PAPER PATH
JS-603
OUTLINE
A10FT1C001DA
2
3. CONFIGURATION
JS-603
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10FT2C001DB
Conveyance/exit section
A10FT2C002DB
3
4. DRIVE
JS-603
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
Tray3 exit roller retraction

motor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)

CONFIGURATION/
A10FT2C003DA
OPERATION
4
5. OPERATION
5.1 Conveyance/exit section
JS-603
• Drive from the paper passage motor/1 causes the corresponding exit roller to rotate,
thereby conveying the paper into the tray.
• The paper passage motor/1 is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper
has activated the paper passage sensor/1.
• Drive of the paper passage motor/1 rotates the exit roller, so that paper is conveyed into
the tray.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit roller
A10FT2C004DB
5.1.2 Conveyance path switching

• The horizontal conveyance section of FS-527 is provided with a conveyance path switch-
ing mechanism for conveying paper onto JS-603. For details of the mechanism, see the
horizontal conveyance section of FS-527.
5
5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism

• The tray3 full sensor is located at the exit of the tray, detecting a full-of-paper condition of
JS-603
the tray.
• The actuator is operated each time paper is fed into the tray. When the level of paper fed
into the tray reaches a predetermined value (capacity), the sensor is blocked and the
main body determines that the tray is full of paper.
• The number of sheets of paper that is detected as a full-of-paper condition is 100 sheets
in terms of plain paper.
• The number of sheets of paper detected as a full-of-paper condition, however, varies
depending on the environmental conditions and the amount of curl in paper.
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Actuator
A10FT2C005DA
6
5.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction

• The tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows paper
JS-603
to be temporarily fed into the tray when a 2-sided print cycle is commanded.
• When a pressure/retraction command is received, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is
energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn, which causes the lifting lever to
swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and retracted.
Lifting cam
Lifting lever Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller retraction

sensor (PS35)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit roller
A10FT2C006DA
Pressure Retraction
Lifting cam
Lifting lever
Exit roller
A10FT2C007DB
7

• The exit roller is normally in its retracted condition. It is pressed during a 2-sided print
cycle and paper exit into tray 3.
JS-603
• When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close,
the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized to bring the exit roller into its retracted
condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
Roller pressure/retraction condition

Normal printing Retracted
2-sided printing (except for small size paper)
Retracted → pressed → retracted
The main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode

• When the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half
turn. The lifting lever is then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/retraction opera-
tion.
• Whether the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the
condition of the exit roller, either pressed or retracted.
CONFIGURATION/
• When the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked and unblocked, the tray3 exit roller
OPERATION
retraction motor is deenergized to stop the operation.
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor

Pressed Blocked
Retracted Unblocked
Exit roller Lifting cam Tray3 exit roller retraction

motor (M17)
Lifting lever
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
A10FT2C008DA
8
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
FS-529
FS-529
OUTLINE
2. PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 3
OUTLINE
3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 6
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 7
5.1 Conveyance section.............................................................................................. 7
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.1.2 Conveyance path switching........................................................................... 8
5.1.3 Tray exit roller pressure/retraction ................................................................. 9
5.2 Alignment section ............................................................................................... 11
5.2.1 Drive............................................................................................................ 11
5.2.2 Operation .................................................................................................... 12
5.3 Stapler ................................................................................................................ 13
5.3.1 Drive............................................................................................................ 13
5.3.2 Operation .................................................................................................... 14
5.4 Exit tray section .................................................................................................. 15
5.4.1 Drive............................................................................................................ 15
5.4.2 Operation .................................................................................................... 16
i
FS-529
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
FS-529
A. Type
Type Multi staple finisher built into the main body

Installation Installed in main body
B. Functions
Modes Sort, group, sort offset, group offset, sort staple
OUTLINE
C. Paper
Capacity
Size Type Letter S, A4S, Legal, B4,

8-1/2 X 11S or 8-1/2 X 14 or
less greater
Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) 300 sheets 250 sheets
(16 to 24 lb) (30 copies) (30 copies)
Thick paper 1
(91 to 150 g/m2)
(24.25 to 40 lb)
A6S, A5S/A5, B6S, B5S/B5, Thick paper 2
A4S/A4, B4, A3, A3 Wide (151 to 209 g/m2)
5-1/2 X 8-1/2S/5-1/2 X 8-1/2, (40.25 to 55.5 lb)
8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, Thick paper 3
8-1/2 X 14, 11 X 17, 12-1/4 X 18 (210 to 256 g/m2)
Special 10 sheets
Max.: 311.15 mm X 1200 mm (55.75 to 68 lb)
12.25 inch X 47.24 inch paper
Thick paper 4
Min.: 90 mm X 139.7 mm
(257 to 271 g/m2)
3.54 inch X 5.5 inch
(68.25 to 72 lb)
OHP film
Label
Envelope
Long size paper ⎯
D. Offset function
Shift amount 30 mm
Types of paper to
Plain paper, Thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2 , 24.25 to 55.5 lb)
be used
B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3
Size
8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, 8-1/2 X 14, 11 X 17
1
E. Stapling
Letter S, A4S, 8-1/2 X 11S or less 50 sheets

FS-529
No. of sheets to be
Legal, B4, 8-1/2 X 14 or greater 30 sheets
stapled
80 to 90 g/m2 (21.25 to 24 lb): 48 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2 (55.5 lb))
Back of the corner
Stapling position Front of the corner
Center two points
F. Machine specifications

OUTLINE
Power require-
ments DC5.1 V ± 5 %
Max. power con-
56 W or less
sumption
471 mm (W) X 564 mm (D) X 147 mm (H)
Dimensions
18.54 inch (W) X 22.2 inch (D) X 5.79 inch (H)
G. Operating environment
NOTE
2
2. PAPER PATH
FS-529
OUTLINE
A0U7T1C001DA
3
FS-529
OUTLINE
Blank Page
4
3. CONFIGURATION
FS-529
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0U7T2C015DA
Conveyance section
Exit tray section Alignment section Staple section
A0U7T2C001DA
5
4. DRIVE
FS-529
Conveyance motor/1 (M5)

CONFIGURATION/
Exit roller
OPERATION
Pick up roller position

motor (M1)
A0U7T2C002DA
6
5. OPERATION
5.1 Conveyance section
FS-529
• Drive from the conveyance motor/1 and conveyance motor/2 cause the corresponding
roller to rotate, thereby conveying the paper into the tray.
• After it is determined that the paper has been fed out of the main body, the conveyance
motor/1 and conveyance motor/2 are energized.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0U7T2C003DA
7
5.1.2 Conveyance path switching

• The conveyance path is switched to conveyance paper onto the duplex section.
FS-529
• The paper path switching guide works to switch the conveyance path as necessary. The
lever is operated to swing up and down the paper path switching guide when the flapper
solenoid is energized.
Flapper solenoid (SD4)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Lever A0U7T2C004DA
8
5.1.3 Tray exit roller pressure/retraction

• The exit roller is retracted as necessary in order to conveyance the paper from the main
FS-529
body temporarily onto the alignment section.
• After the alignment operation is completed, the exit roller is pressed again, so that the
paper is fed into the tray.
• The exit roller is pressed or retracted by the pickup roller position motor.
• The exit roller is moved up or down via a gear train when the pick up roller position motor
is energized.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit roller Pick up roller position Pick up roller position
motor (M1) sensor (PS12)
A0U7T2C005DA

• The exit roller is normally in its retracted condition.
• When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or a cover open/close,
the pick up roller position motor is energized to bring the exit roller into its retracted con-
dition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
9

• When the pick up roller position motor is energized, the gear is rotated. The exit roller is
then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/retraction operation.
FS-529
• Whether the pick up roller position sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the condi-
tion of the exit roller, either pressed or retracted.
Pick up roller position sensor

Pressed Unblocked
Retracted Blocked
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Pick up roller position Actuator

sensor (PS12)
A0U7T2C006DA
10
5.2 Alignment section

5.2.1 Drive
FS-529
Alignment plate/R Alignment plate/F
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment motor/R (M4) Alignment motor/F (M3)
A0U7T2C007DA
11
5.2.2 Operation
A. Alignment section
FS-529
• The alignment section performs stapling, aligning, sorting, and offsetting.

• The paper is conveyed, one sheet at a time, onto the alignment section for subsequent
necessary operation.
B. Alignment plate
• The alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R align the paper.
• The alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R are driven by the alignment motor/F and
alignment motor/R, respectively.
The alignment plate home sensor/F and alignment plate home sensor/R detect the posi-
tion of the alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R, respectively.
Alignment plate home sensor/R (PS9) Alignment plate home sensor/F (PS8)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0U7T2C008DA
C. Shift control
• In the sort or group copy mode, the alignment plate shifts to the front or rear. This stacks
copy sets/stacks in a saw tooth manner, each being offset by about 30 mm with respect
to the others.
• The registration in normal print mode varies depending on the paper size, stapling posi-
tion, and the position of the alignment plate during paper exit.
Alignment plate/R
30 mm
Alignment plate/F
A0U7T2C009DA
12
5.3 Stapler
5.3.1 Drive
FS-529
Stapler movement motor (M7)
Stapler home sensor (PS11)
CONFIGURATION/
Stapler Drive belt
OPERATION
A0U7T2C010DA
13
5.3.2 Operation
A. Stapler movement
FS-529
• The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.

• The stapler movement motor rotates to drive the belt, which in turn moves the stapler
unit.
• The stapling position is controlled based on the number of pulses generated by the sta-
pler movement motor. No position sensors are provided for back corner stapling and two-
point stapling.
The stapler home sensor determines the home position of the stapler, as that may be
needed when the stapler is brought to a stop at an irregular position during, for example,
a malfunction. In such cases, the stapler is moved until the stapler home sensor is
blocked.
B. Stapling operation
• The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.
• In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper.
Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Clincher
Stapler motor (M8)
A0U7T2C011DA
14
5.4 Exit tray section

5.4.1 Drive
FS-529
Paper surface detect
solenoid (SD1)
Exit roller
Tray up/down operation
Conveyance sensor (PS4)
motor/2 (M6)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
sensor/1 (PS2)
Tray up/down motor (M2)
sensor/2 (PS3)
Tray lower limit sensor (PS6) A0U7T2C012DA
15
5.4.2 Operation
A. Tray up/down
FS-529
• When the tray up/down motor is energized, the corresponding arm is operated via a gear
train to raise the tray.
• The upper limit of motion of the tray is established by a stopper provided in the finisher.
The tray is lowered as the motor rotates backward.
• The tray lower limit sensor detects the lower limit of motion of the tray.
Tray up/down motor (M2)
Exit tray
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Arm
A0U7T2C013DA
B. Full-of-paper condition detection

• The paper surface detect sensor/1 and paper surface detect sensor/2 detect a full-of-
paper condition in the tray. If the paper surface detect sensor/1/2 is not blocked
(unblocked) even when the paper surface detect solenoid is energized, the main body
determines that the tray is full of paper.

Actuator sensor/1 (PS2)

sensor/2 (PS3)
Paper surface detect solenoid (SD1)

A0U7T2C014DA
16
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
AU-102/AU-201
AU-102/AU-201
AU-102
1. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
AU-201
1. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 2
1
AU-102/AU-201
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
2
AU-102
AU-102/AU-201
1. CONFIGURATION
Finger
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Authentication unit (AU-102) A0P0T2C581AA
2. OPERATION
• A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.
• Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein
patterns extremely difficult to forge or falsify. The vein pattern authentication system can
provide high security.
• With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is
created. The vein pattern image is registered and a person can be identified if the per-
son’s vein pattern matches the registered one at the time of user authentication.
1
AU-201
AU-102/AU-201
1. CONFIGURATION
Abcde Fgdhi
CONFIGURATION/
ABCDE_Co.
OPERATION
Non-contact IC card
Authentication unit (AU-201)

A00HT2C302AA
2. OPERATION
• A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.
• The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B,
and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.
• It can be used that the card corresponded to Felica, TypeA, SSFC (Shared Security For-
mats Cooperation), FCF (Felica common-use format), or FCF campus.
• Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from
the card.
2
2010.04
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE

CONTENTS
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-604
1. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
EK-605
1. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3
SC-507
1. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 4
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 4
i
EK-604/605/SC-507
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Blank Page
ii
EK-604
EK-604/605/SC-507
1. CONFIGURATION
USB terminal (extension) USB terminal (standard)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Local Interface Kit EK-604
A0YCT2C502AA
2. OPERATION
• The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
• Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard
input.
1
EK-605
EK-604/605/SC-507
1. CONFIGURATION
USB terminal (extension) USB terminal (standard)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0YCT2C504AA
2
2. OPERATION
EK-604/605/SC-507
• The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
• Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard
input.
• The local interface kit is mounted when the voice guidance function and functions inter-
acting with the portable phone or PDA (portable data terminal) compatible with Bluetooth
are to be used. It has a built-in speaker and Bluetooth communication receiver.
• Using Bluetooth, the user can print files directly from the portable phone, download and
print PDF or other files from the portable phone, or save them in a box.
CONFIGURATION/
• If an XHTML file is downloaded from the portable phone, an image file can be down-
OPERATION
loaded from the URL described in XHTML and printed as an image onto a location spec-
ified in the XHTML document.
Portable phone, PDA A0YCT2C503AA
3
SC-507
EK-604/605/SC-507
1. CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Security Kit SC-507
A0Y9T2C501AA
2. OPERATION
• The security kit offers the copy guard (copy prohibited) and password copy functions in
addition to the conventional copy protect function. The copy guard security pattern or
password copy security pattern printed on the original is detected to thereby prevent
unauthorized copies from being produced.
* The copy guard security pattern and password copy security pattern can be detected
only by the Konica Minolta machine mounted with the copy guard and password copy
functions.
Copy
Print
Detecting the copy

guard security pat-
tern to discard the
job.
Making a copy from an

output produced by add-
ing the copy guard secu-
rity pattern or password
copy security pattern.
Copying enabled through

password input. A0Y9T2C504AA
4
© 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to

DDA1UD-M-TE1
avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Bizhub423 - Theoryof Operation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub423 - Theoryof Operation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

bizhub 423/363/283/223 Main body

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium

:Precaution when servicing the

:Prohibition when servicing the

:Direction when servicing the

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.).

• Making any modification to the product unless instructed

• Using parts not specified by KMBT.

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet

• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

Power Plug and Cord

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Prohibited Installation Places

• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such

When not Using the Product for a long time

Inspection before Servicing

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

Inspection before Servicing

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover

• If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with

• Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be atten-

• When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other

• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,

• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and

• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

Handling of Service Materials

• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before

• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

[4] Used Batteries Precautions

[5] Laser Safety

5.1 Internal Laser Radiation

Print Head Unit